2005 CS Pacifica

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 10
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION WARNING!
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and known to the State of California to cause cancer and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
aware of all safety warnings.
contains the information you desire.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni- complete listing of all subjects.
cians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction. Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information Vehicle Identification Number
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle. NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.
Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle
identification number and optional equipment.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS

1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 䡵 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 Illuminated Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ To Program Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ To Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped . .22
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Turn Off “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” . . .23 ▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
䡵 Vehicle Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
䡵 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .39 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
either side up. place.
Ignition Key Removal
2
The shift lever must be in PARK. Turn the key to the
LOCK position, then remove the key.
Vehicle Key
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
Ignition Key Positions
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power

CAUTION!
sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for up to 45
seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off. An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is danger- Key-In-Ignition Reminder
ous for a number of reasons. A child or others could If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the ignition
switch, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch
the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector key.
lever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child SENTRY KEY
could operate power windows, other controls, or The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
move the vehicle. rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.
The system will shut the engine off after 2 seconds of
running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. This
system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic
chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only keys that If the Theft Alarm/Immobilizer Light comes on during
have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start normal vehicle operation (vehicle has been running for
and operate the vehicle. longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in the
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be
electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as 2
possible.
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic
regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or NOTE:
unlocked. During normal operation, the Theft Alarm/ • The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
Immobilizer Light will come on for three (3) seconds with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
bulb check. Afterwards, if the bulb remains on, this security protection.
indicates a problem with the electronics.
• Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this any other transponder equipped components on the
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the same keychain will not cause a key-related (transpon-
vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine der) fault unless the additional part is physically held
being shut off after two (2) seconds of running. against the ignition key being used when starting the
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
Keep in mind that a key which has not been programmed
will not cause interference with this system.
is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
been programmed to the vehicle electronics. System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
Replacement Keys
Customer Key Programming
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
You can program new sentry keys to the system if you
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
have two valid sentry keys by performing the following
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it can
procedure:
not be programmed to any other vehicle.
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may 2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle remove the first key.
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
programmed.
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime
will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and General Information
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10 The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
seconds a single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off. subject to the following conditions: 2
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. The Keyless • This device may not cause harmful interference.
Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this
• This device must accept any interference that may be
procedure.
received, including interference that may cause undes-
Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys. ired operation.
If you do not have a programmed sentry key, contact
your dealer for details. ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless
NOTE: If a programmed key has been lost, see your entry transmitter or open the doors.
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tems memory. The remaining keys must then repro- The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
grammed. This will prevent the lost key from starting will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
your vehicle. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer turned on.
at the time of service to be reprogrammed. NOTE: The overhead console, door courtesy, liftgate
and reading lights will not operate if the dimmer control
is in the “defeat” position (extreme downward position).
DOOR LOCKS If the lock knob is up when you shut the door, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not inside the
Manual Door Locks
vehicle before closing the door.
Lock the doors by pushing up on the lock knob on each
door trim panel.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per-
sonal injuries and death.
Door Lock Plunger

Power Door Locks locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition and a door 2
is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if:
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled,
2. The transmission is in gear,
3. all doors are closed,
4. the vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h) and
Power Door Lock Switch 5. the doors were not previously locked using the power
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power The Automatic Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by
performing the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled,
switch.
2. the transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
2. Cycle the ignition switch ON/OFF four times ending returned to 0 mph (0 km/h),
in the OFF position. (do not start the engine)
3. the transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK,
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the interior
4. the driver door is opened (excluding liftgate),
driver’s door lock switch to the LOCK position.
5. the doors were not previously unlocked and
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming. 6. the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the above The Automatic Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by
mentioned procedure or by performing the procedure in performing the following procedure:
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), Cus-
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
tomer Programmable Features section on vehicles so
switch.
equipped.
2. Cycle the ignition switch ON/OFF four times ending
Auto Unlock On Exit— If Equipped
in the OFF position. (do not start the engine)
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if: 3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the interior
driver’s door lock switch to the UNLOCK position.
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have Child Protection Door Lock
successfully completed the programming. To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child
The Auto Unlock On Exit feature is enabled when your
vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can be
protection door lock system. 2
enabled or disabled by performing the procedure in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), Customer WARNING!
Programmable Features section or by repeating the above
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
mentioned procedure.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock from the outside when the child protection locks are
features in accordance with local laws. engaged.
To activate the system, open the rear door and move the REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
child lock control, located near the door’s rear latch, to This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
the ON position. liftgate, and activate the panic alarm from distances up to
about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held radio trans-
mitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system.
NOTE: If the key is in the ignition switch, then all
buttons on that transmitter will be disabled. The buttons
on the remaining transmitters will work. If the vehicle is
shifted out of PARK, all the transmitter buttons are
disabled for all keys.
Child Lock Control

When the child lock system is engaged the door can be
opened only by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
NOTE: If desired, the “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door

1st” feature can be turned on and off by referring to the
Customer Programmable Features of the “Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC)” section or by following 2
these steps.
1. Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after 4 sec-
onds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.
The “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
Keyless Entry Transmitter To lock the doors and liftgate:
To unlock the doors and liftgate: Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter lock all doors and liftgate. The horn will chirp once to
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all acknowledge the signal. If desired, the “Sound Horn On
doors and liftgate. The illuminated entry system also Lock” feature can be turned on and off by referring to the
turns on.
Customer Programmable Features of the “Electronic Ve- NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
hicle Information Center (EVIC)” section or by following the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
these steps. closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
To Program Transmitters:
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after 4 seconds),
Refer to SENTRY KEY “Customer Key Programming.”
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contact
The “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be reactivated by
your dealer for details.
repeating this procedure.
To Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Using The Panic Alarm:
Press the LIFTGATE button twice within five seconds to
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
open/close the power liftgate. The liftgate will beep for 2
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
seconds and then open/close. If the button is pushed
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
while the liftgate is being power closed, the liftgate will
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
reverse to the full open position.
on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
powered liftgate, pressing the button will result in the
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or
liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you
turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
to manually access the liftgate area. The liftgate will Function Which Turn Signal Number of
re-lock automatically within 10 seconds once the liftgate Lamps Flashes
is closed. Lock All 1
To Turn Off “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” Unlock 1st Driver’s Side 2 2
Press
NOTE: If desired, the “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock”
Unlock All All 2
feature can be turned on and off by referring to the Doors
Customer Programmable Features of the “Electronic Ve-
Liftgate All 2
hicle Information Center (EVIC)” section or by following
these steps. General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
2. While the LOCK button is pressed, (after 4 seconds) following conditions:
press the UNLOCK button. Release both buttons.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can be
• This device must accept any interference received,
reactivated by repeating this procedure. The table below
including interference that may cause undesired op-
explains the Lamp Flash options.
eration.
If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate

from a normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board. Separating Transmitter Halves
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
1. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a small
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
screwdriver or similar flat object to pry the two halves of
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
the transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
rubbing alcohol.
rubber gasket during removal.
3. To reassemble the transmitter case, snap the two To arm the system: Remove the key from the ignition
halves together. Make sure there is an even “gap” be- switch and either:
tween the two halves. Test transmitter operation.
1. Press a power door lock switch while the driver’s or
passenger’s door is open.
2
VEHICLE THEFT ALARM
This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition 2. Press the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmit-
switch for unauthorized entry or operation. When the ter.
alarm is activated, the system provides both audible and
visual signals. The horn will pulse, headlights/park After the last door is closed, or if all doors are closed, the
lights will flash, the Vehicle Theft Alarm/Immobilizer system will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that
light, located above the driver’s center instrument panel time, the Vehicle Theft Alarm/Immobilizer light will
vent will flash, and the vehicle will not start. If the alarm flash. If it does not illuminate, the system is not arming.
is triggered and no action is taken to disarm it, the system If you open a door during this arming period, the system
will turn off the horn after three minutes and after 15 will cancel the arming process. You must repeat one of
minutes of light only operation the system will then the previously described arming sequences to rearm the
rearm itself. system.
To disarm the system: Press the UNLOCK button on the into the liftgate area. If the liftgate is not opened within
keyless entry transmitter. Also, using a valid sentry key 30 seconds the liftgate will automatically re-lock
and moving the ignition switch to the ON/START posi- within 10 seconds.
tion will disarm the system. If you disarm the system and
• The system remains armed during liftgate entry, press-
access the liftgate area, the system must be rearmed, as
ing the liftgate button will not disarm the system, if
described previously, when closing the liftgate. If some-
someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and
thing has triggered the system in your absence, the horn
opens any door the alarm will sound.
will sound three times when you disarm the system.
Check the vehicle for tampering. • When the system is armed, the doors can not be
unlocked from the interior power door lock switches.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button The Vehicle Theft Alarm system is designed to protect
on the keyless entry transmitter cannot arm or disarm your vehicle, however, you can create conditions where
the system. the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
• Once the alarm is set, and the liftgate button on the
system will arm regardless of whether you are in the
keyless entry transmitter is pressed, on a non-power
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
liftgate vehicle, you have a 30 second one time access
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
system.
The alarm system will be activated when the battery is

connected if the system was previously armed. The
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound, and the
ignition will not start the vehicle. If this occurs, disarm 2
the system.
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked using the remote keyless
entry or by activating the power door lock switches
located on the front doors.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed. To
open the liftgate, depress the liftgate release switch
Liftgate Release Switch
located in the exterior handle and pull the liftgate open
with one fluid motion. The liftgate will not manually open if the vehicle is in
gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
NOTE: liftgate is fully open, pressing the button twice within

• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
The power liftgate may also be opened by pressing the
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
switch located on the overhead console.
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift-
gate trim panel.
• If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a
powered liftgate, pressing the button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter will result in the liftgate
becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to
manually access the liftgate area. The liftgate will
re-lock automatically within 10 seconds once the lift-
gate is closed.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. Press
Power Liftgate Switch
the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter twice
within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the A beeping signal will sound two seconds before the
liftgate starts to open or close.
WARNING! • The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
any of the close buttons to operate. If the liftgate is not
During power operation, personal injury or cargo fully open, press the open button to fully open the
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is liftgate and then press close. 2
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched • If the liftgate release switch is activated while the
before driving away. power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
NOTE:
• The power liftgate switches will not operate if the
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
(0 km/h).
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance. • The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below ⫺22° F (⫺30° C) or temperatures above 150° F
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
(65° C). Be sure to remove any build-up of snow or ice
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
liftgate switches.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
within the same cycle, the system will automatically However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
stop and must be opened or closed manually. ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
WARNING! WINDOWS
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison- Power Windows
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep door windows.
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
When the lock switch is pressed the window controls on

the passenger doors will not illuminate and the passen-
ger windows will be disabled.
Auto Down Feature
2
All the power window switches have an auto down
feature. Press the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
The power window switches remain active for up to 45
Power Window Switches
seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off.
There are single window controls on each passenger door Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
trim panel which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition Wind Buffeting
switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position. Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
The window lock switch on the driver’s door allows you ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
to disable the window controls on the passenger doors.
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain If your vehicle is equipped with the Occupant Classifi-
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- cation System (OCS) there will be a Passenger Airbag
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light located on the center of
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows the instrument panel.
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger, and if
equipped, left and right window bags for the driver and
passengers seated next to a window and a driver inflat-
able knee blocker. If you will be carrying children too
small for adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the Passenger Airbag Disabled Light
LATCH feature (refer to the Child Restraint section in this
manual), can be used to hold infant and child restraint
systems.
NOTE: The front airbags have a multi stage inflator Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
inflation that are based on collision severity. and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
Please pay close attention to the information in this
far away from home or on your own street. 2
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
possible. of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
WARNING! ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer be belted at all times.
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck- Lap/Shoulder Belts
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the Shoulder Belts.
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock WARNING!

and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out. • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
WARNING! your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, best.
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
people riding in these areas are more likely to be your injuries in a collision much worse. You
seriously injured or killed. might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
belts. your passengers safe, too.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and • Two people should never be belted into a single
using a seat belt properly. seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the
front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Grasp
the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go
around your lap.
Latch Plate
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch WARNING!
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increas-
ing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
Latch Plate To Buckle
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more likely
to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be
used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your WARNING!
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t 2
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision. be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. In the front seats, the shoulder belt anchorage can be
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
allow the belt to retract fully. away from your neck. Press the button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
WARNING! that serves you best.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision

and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will

prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that 2
it is locked in position.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
Positioning Latch Plate

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch

plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Sliding The Latch Plate

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Creating A Fold
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
Seat Belt Pretensioners Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System

The seat belts for both front seating positions are (BeltAlert)
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is 2
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
in a collision. Pretensioners are designed to work for all belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
size occupants. buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled.
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reacti-
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con-
vated if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than
trol module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags,
10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision
km/h).
that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and preten-
sioners, both must be replaced. The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first 4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON signify that you have successfully completed the pro-
or RUN position. DaimlerChrysler does not recommend gramming.
deactivating the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert).
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and vated by repeating this procedure.
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
2. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position (engine (BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
does not need to be running), and wait for the Seat Belt Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
Warning Light to turn off. belt remains unbuckled.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
buckled. the best way to keep the baby safe.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt. across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the WARNING!
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision. Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
Seat Belt Extender increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use 2
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if low and snug, and in the recommended seating
equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can positions. Remove and store the extender when not
provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender needed.
should be used only if the existing belt is not long
enough. When it is not required, remove the extender
and stow it.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental

Restraint System - Airbag
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
Front Airbag Components

NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment in low
speed collisions.
The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal

regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to
“Occupant Classification System” in this section).
This vehicle may also be equipped with a driver inflat-
2
able knee blocker located on the instrument panel below
the steering column.
This vehicle may also be equipped with left and right
window bags to protect the driver and passengers sitting
next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window
bags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
Side Airbag Location
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
WARNING! Along with seat belts, and pretensioners, front airbags

work with the instrument panel knee blockers to provide
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
or attempt to manually open them. You may damage Left and right window bags also work with seat belts to
the airbags and you could be injured because the improve occupant protection.
airbags are not there to protect you. These protective
covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
only when the airbags are inflating. of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right severe frontal collisions.
window bags, do not stack luggage or other cargo up
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
high enough to block the location of the side curtain
airbag. The area where the side curtain airbag is when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi-
located should remain free from any obstructions. fication System (refer to “Occupant Classification Sys-
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right tem” in this section) has determined the seat is empty or
window bags, do not have any accessory items in- is occupied by a child.
stalled which will alter the roof, including adding a If your vehicle is equipped, the window bag on the crash
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the collisions. But even in collisions where the airbags inflate,
roof of the vehicle for any reason. you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position
for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
risk of harm from a deploying airbag. passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
restraint. Refer to the section on Child Restraint. 2
You should read the instructions provided with your
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to 2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder
infants in that position. belts properly.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
vehicle seat belt (refer to section on Child Restraint) moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags
should be secured in the rear seat, in a child restraint or room to inflate.
belt-positioning booster seat appropriate for the size and
4. If your vehicle has left and right window bags, do
age of the child. Older children who do not use a child
not lean against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully
restraint or belt-positioning booster seat should ride
into the space between you and the door.
properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow chil-
dren to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their
arm.
WARNING! “The Airbag System” consists of the following:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work • AIRBAG Readiness Light
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In • Driver Airbag
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you • Front Passenger Airbag
have airbags. • Window Bags above Side Windows — If Equipped
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front airbag deployment could • Front Impact Sensors
cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. • Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. • Steering Wheel and Column
• If the vehicle has left and right window bags, they • Instrument Panel
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
• Seat Belt Readiness Light
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat. • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Interconnecting Wiring severity, the front control module determines the

proper rate of inflation. The front airbag inflators are
• Knee Impact Bolster
designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation.
• Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
• The ORC may modify the rate of inflation based on the
2
• Front Passenger Seat Occupant Classification System occupant size provided by the Occupant Classification
(OCS) Module.
− Occupant Classification Module • The ORC will not detect side, roll over, or rear impacts.
− Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light • The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the
− Interconnecting Wiring
START or RUN positions. These include all of the
− Bladder Assembly items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, instrument panel and passenger knee bol-
− Belt Tension Sensor
sters. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC
How The Airbag System Works position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not on
and will not inflate.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. Based on the level of collision
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning WARNING!

light and PAD indicator light in the center of
the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru-
self-check when the ignition is first turned on. ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags
After the self-check, the AIRBAG warning light will turn to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
off. The PAD indicator light will function normally (Refer come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
to “Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light” in comes on as you drive, have the airbag system
this section). If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part checked right away.
of the system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
sound if the light comes on again after initial start up.
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC and
impact sensors detects a collision requiring the air-
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags.
Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based
on collision severity and occupant size. The steering
wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the
instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the airbags inflate to their full size. The airbags fully about 30 milliseconds (about one quarter of the time it
inflate in about 50–70 milliseconds. This is about half takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure
of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The airbags then you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and items are positioned in the area where the window bag 2
front passenger. inflates. This especially applies to children. The win-
dow bag is only about 31⁄2 inches (9 cm) thick when it
The driver’s and passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
is inflated.
through the airbag material towards the instrument
panel. In this way the airbags do not interfere with • When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a
your control of the vehicle. collision requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
, it signals the inflator unit. A quantity of nontoxic gas
• The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to
is generated to inflate the Driver Inflatable Knee
activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC
Blocker. The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker inflates
and the side impact sensors (with side impact option)
rearward towards the driver’s knees to help protect
detects a collision requiring the window bags to
the knees and position you for the best interaction
inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
with the front airbag. The Driver Inflatable Knee
vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
Blocker fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds, this is
inflate the window bag. The inflating window bag
only about half of the time it takes you to blink your
pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the
eyes. It then quickly deflates while helping to protect
way and covers the window. The airbag inflates in
the driver’s knees.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees, and If there is a rapid change in temperature or humidity,
position everyone for the best interaction with the the OCS may not be able to properly approximate
front airbag. occupant size. If your seat including your trim cover
and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
• If your vehicle contains a Passenger Airbag Disable
ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach-
indicator light, it will be equipped with the Occupant
ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Classification System (OCS). The OCS system will
Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
classify an occupant into a size category based on
used.
sensor readings from within the seat cushion. Occu-
pants should try to remain in a normally seated If there is a fault present in the system, the AIRBAG
position. If the occupant’s weight is transferred to warning light will illuminate indicating that you should
another object in the vehicle (i.e. feet on the dash- take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. In the presence
board), the OCS may not be able to properly approxi- of an occupant in the passenger seat, if both the PAD
mate occupant size. Furthermore, the occupant size indicator light and AIRBAG warning light are illumi-
may appear to increase or decrease due to objects nated the airbag will be disabled.
hanging on the seat, other passengers pushing on the
seat, or objects lodged underneath the seat.
The ORC will not allow front airbag deployment in the

event of a collision for occupants classified into the
empty or child size categories. The PAD indicator light
will illuminate indicating that the Passenger Airbag is 2
OFF when the OCS has determined that the occupant size
category is a child. Also, when the seat is empty or an
object that weighs less than a predetermined threshold is
placed on the seat, the light will remain OFF. (The PAD
indicator light is an amber light located on the center of
the instrument panel above the climate controls.)
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light

For almost all sizes of properly seated adults, the airbag classifies the occupant into one of three size categories
will be enabled in the event of a collision. For small based on the input from the Bladder Assembly and
teenagers and some small adults, depending on size, the Belt Tension Sensor. The size categories include empty,
airbag may or may not be enabled in the event of a child, and adult. The OCM sends the Occupant Clas-
collision. Both drivers and passengers should always use sification to the ORC to identify if a front passenger
the PAD indicator light as an indication if the front airbag is allowed. If a fault is present, the AIRBAG
passenger is properly positioned or not. If the PAD warning light is illuminated.
indicator light comes on when an adult is in the passen-
• The Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator
ger seat, have the passenger re-position themselves in the
Light indicates to the driver and passenger when the
seat until the light goes out.
airbag is turned OFF in the presence of a properly
Remember, if the PAD indicator light is illuminated the seated occupant. When the PAD indicator light is
passenger front airbag will not inflate. For properly illuminated, the airbag is OFF. Also, when the Occu-
installed child restraint systems and children properly pant Classification System (OCS) detects either an
seated on the front passenger seat, the airbag will be empty seat of a weight less than the predetermined
disabled. If at all possible, place children 12 years and occupant threshold, the ORC will not illuminate the
younger in a back seat. PAD indicator light even though the airbag is turned
off. When the OCS detects an adult the PAD indicator
• The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is lo-
light will be off, and the airbag will be enabled.
cated beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
• The Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) is located at the WARNING!

outboard passenger lap belt anchor. The BTS generates
a signal based on outboard lap belt tension. This signal Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
is sent to the OCM to ensure that the resultant bladder the front passenger seat assembly, its related compo- 2
pressure increase due to applied lap belt tension does nents, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
not cause a small occupant to be classified as a larger airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
occupant. could result in death or serious injury to the front
• The Bladder Assembly is located beneath the seat seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci-
cushion foam. The pressure sensor sends a signal to dent. A modified vehicle may not comply with
the OCM. required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com-
ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy-
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
ment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo-
nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System • Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calcu- components in any way.
late the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
• Do not modify the front seat center console or center
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
position seat in any way.
assembly, or to the seat cover.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not If A Deployment Occurs
designated for the specific model being repaired. Al- The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags
ways use the correct seat cover specified for the when the ORC and impact sensors detect a moderate-to-
vehicle. severe collision, to help restrain the vehicle passengers,
and then immediately deflate.
• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover. NOTE: A collision that is not severe enough to need
airbag protection will not activate the system. This does
• Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system
or all of the following may occur:
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas-
tener be modified or replaced with any part except • The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/ sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
Mopar. passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a WARNING!

few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately. Deployed airbags, seat belt pretensioners and driver
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like inflatable knee blocker cannot protect you in an- 2
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the other collision. Have the airbags, seat belt preten-
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag sioners, driver inflatable knee blocker and the front
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, passenger seat belt retractor assembly, replaced by
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Also, have
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat the Occupant Classification System serviced as well.
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your Enhanced Accident Response
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc- If the airbags and seat belt pertensioners deploy after an
tions for cleaning. impact and the electrical system remains functional,
vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
automatically. In addition, approximately 10 seconds
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
after the vehicle has stopped moving, the interior lights
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
will illuminate until the ignition switch is turned off.
Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING!
WARNING! • You need proper knee impact protection in a

collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
it to fail when you need it. You could be injured because the
airbags are not there to protect you. Do not modify the • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
components or wiring, including adding any kind of airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify
the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag Airbag Light
system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not You will want to have the airbags ready to
function properly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
system service. If your seat including your trim cover and the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer ap-
proved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to • The AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during
modify an advanced airbag system for persons with dis-
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
turned on.
• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second WARNING!

interval.
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The 2
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
Child Restraint could become so great that you could not hold the
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
United States and all Canadian provinces require that your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the child’s size.
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck- Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
led up in a seat appropriate for their age and size. Each vehicle, is equipped with two child restraint anchor-
According to crash statistics, children are safer when age systems called LATCH, which stands for Lower
properly restrained in the rear seats, rather than in the Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH child
front. restraint anchorage systems are installed on all second-
row seats.
The lower anchor bars of the LATCH System are located

where the seat back meets the seat cushion.
Tether Strap Mounting

Child restraint systems designed to be compatible with
Latch Anchorages the vehicles LATCH System are now available. LATCH
The tether anchors are located on the rear surface of the child restraints make installation into the vehicle simple
seat. and convenient.
When using the LATCH System, always follow the child

restraint manufactures installation instructions.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com-
patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
2
Tether Anchors
There are tether strap anchorages behind all second row
seating positions and if equipped the driver’s side third
row seating position. The tether anchors are located in
the rear surface of the seat. When using the tether
anchorages in the second row seating position, ensure
that the strap is routed over the top of the seatback and
under the head restraint between the head restraint posts. Second Row Tether
When the tether anchorage is used in the third row Infants and Children
seating position, the strap should be positioned straight There are different sizes and types of restraints for
over the top of the seatback. children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the right seat for
your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child:
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 9 kg (20 lbs). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil-
dren (LATCH)” in this section.
Third Row Tether Strap Routing
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up children who weigh 9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lbs) and who
to about 9 kg (20 lbs). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be are older than one year.
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
2
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
ing more than 18 kg (40 lbs), but who are still too small
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child can
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
not sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat cushion
by children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) but are
while the child’s back is against the seat back, they
less than one year old.
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap
injury or death to infants in this position. portion.)
• Children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) and who NOTE: For additional information refer to
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the www.seatcheck.org.
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
WARNING! that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
collision. The child could be badly injured or
weight and height limits.
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint. • Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re- not work when you need it.
straint in the front seat may be struck by a The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching
deploying passenger airbag which may cause se- latch plates, which are designed to keep the lap
vere or fatal injury to the infant. portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. Pulling up on the
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten
restraint: the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt
tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen with
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety necessary.
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
restraint manufacturer’s directions. straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the 2
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
cause serious personal injury. connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
Installing A Child Restraint
to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
older products.
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the ages will continue to have features for installation in
tension in the strap. vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage over the front of the seat when their back is against the
of all of the available attachments provided with your seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
child restraint in any vehicle.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
as possible.
tions that come with the child restraint system.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
WARNING! slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
Improper installation of a child restraint to the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or their back.
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint. Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
a collision.
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. 2
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
your new vehicle. shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 USED.
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in. considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
detrimental and should be avoided.
SAFETY TIPS WARNING!

Exhaust Gas
If you are required to drive with the deck lid/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the
WARNING! climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO) Vehicle
follow the safety tips below. Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
out of the area.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Light lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
The light should come on and remain on for 6 cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (includ-
to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition ing spare) for proper pressure.
switch is first turned ON. If the LED is not lit
Lights
2
during starting, have it checked. If the light
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
stays on or comes on while driving, have the system
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
checked by an authorized dealer.
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Defroster
Fluid Leaks
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
feel the air directed against the windshield.
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid or brake
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and
The Vehicle corrected immediately.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 ▫ Heated Remote Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . .76 䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .76 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
▫ Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . .77 ▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . .77 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Power Remote-Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 ▫ Third Row Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 113

▫ 10–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . 102 ▫ Load Floor — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ 8–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . 103 ▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ 4–Way Passenger’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 䡵 Driver Memory System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 116
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Second Row Manual Seat Recliner ▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . . . . . 120
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster
▫ Multi-Function Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
▫ Second Row Bench Seating — If Equipped . . . 109
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Second Row Fold & Tumble Seats
▫ Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) . . . . . 124
▫ Third Row Easy Exit — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 111
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 䡵 Traction Control Switch — If Equipped . . . . . . . 130

▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 䡵 Rear Park Assist System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 131
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3
▫ Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . 125 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 ▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . 126 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 䡵 Overhead Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 ▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 ▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 138 ▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 150
▫ Programming Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 143 ▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Using Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 ▫ Second Row Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Erasing Homelink Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 ▫ Third Row Seat Cupholders — If Equipped . . . 151
▫ Reprogramming a Single Homelink Button . . . 144 䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 ▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 ▫ Rear Cargo Storage Bin — If Equipped . . . . . . 152
▫ Express Open Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 ▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped . 152
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 ▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 155
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 䡵 Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
MIRRORS Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the

small control under the mirror to the night position
Inside Day/Night Mirror
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical adjustment of the mirror.
3
Adjusting Rear View Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

CAUTION!
If the switch is in the “Auto” position the mirror will
automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare from To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light in the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
mirror will illuminate to indicate when this feature is on. wipe the mirror clean.
Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If

Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn this feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
Rearview Mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions; full forward, full rearward, and
Automatic Dimming Mirror normal.
Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side WARNING!

Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
inside mirror. convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side than they really are. Relying too much on your right
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the side mirror could cause you to collide with another 3
side of your vehicle in the portion of the mirror closest to vehicle or other object.
the vehicle. This type of mirror will give a much wider Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror.
vehicle.
Power Remote-Control Mirrors Press the rocker switch to the L or R for Left or Right
Use the mirror select switch, located on the driver’s door mirror selection. Use the center off position to guard
trim panel above the power window switches, to adjust against accidentally moving a mirror position.
the view obtained in the outside mirrors.
Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the
direction you want the mirror to move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Memory
Seat” in section 3 of this manual.
Heated Remote Control Mirrors
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window
Defrost.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
Power Mirror Switches the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Sun Visor Extension For UConnect Customer Support call 1-877-855-8400 or

The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended visit the UConnect website (www.chrysler.com/
coverage of the side glass. uconnect).
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) — UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
IF EQUIPPED
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
3
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial phone for private conversation.
a phone number with your cellular phone* using simple The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call ѧ Mike ѧWork⬙ or ⬙Dial ѧ names and four numbers per name. This system is driven
248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will phone. UConnect™ features Bluetooth™ technology - the
automatically mute your radio when using the UCon- global standard that enables different electronic devices
nect™ system. to connect to each other without wires or a docking
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular station, so UConnect works no matter where you stow
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ your cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or brief-
version 0.96 or higher. case), as long as your phone is turned on and has been
paired to the vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UCon-
nect™ system allows up to seven cellular phones to be
linked to system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular

phone can be used with the system at a time. The system
is available in English, Spanish, or French languages (as
equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system. The diagram below shows the mirror
with the appropriate buttons. Individual button behavior
is discussed in the ⬙Operation⬙ section.
UConnect™ Switches
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-
Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. If your
cellular phone supports a different profile (eg., Headset
Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect™
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the • For certain operations, compound commands can be
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™ used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
system can either be adjusted from the radio volume ⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
(right switch), if so equipped.
• For each of the feature explanation in this section, only
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the combined form of the voice command is given.
3
the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on You can also break the commands into parts and say
certain radios. each part of the command, when you are asked for it.
For example, you can either use the combined form
Operation
voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
break the combined form command into two voice
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
commands: ⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please re-
structure. Voice commands are required after most
member, the UConnect™ system works best when you
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
specific command and then guided through the available
some one sitting eight feet away from you.
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt
or another prompt.
Help Command Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone

If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
know what your options are at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone (re-
following the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will fer to ⬙Introduction⬙ section to learn about the phone
play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help. type). To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
that you have:
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
NOTE: www.chrysler.com/uconnect
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu. pairing instructions:
However, in a few instances the system will take you
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
back to the previous menu.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ⬙Pair a
Phone.⬙
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number which only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
you will later need to enter into your cellular. You can your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
enter any four-digit pin number. You will not need to UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
remember this pin number after the initial pairing use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
process. same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you to begin
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™ 3
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
phone. Before attempting to pair phone, please see
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
your cellular phone’s user manual (Bluetooth section)
Connectivity⬙ section).
for instructions on how to complete this step.
Dial by Saying a Number
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
⬙Dial.⬙
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
• System will prompt you to say the number you want
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
call.
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙ The phone • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
number that you enter must be of valid length and the name of the person you want to call. For example,
combination. The UConnect™ limits the user from you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ-
dialing invalid combination of numbers. For example, ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone-
234-567-890 is nine digits long, which is not a valid book. Refer to section ⬙Add Names to Your UCon-
phone number - the closest valid phone number has nect™ Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the
ten digits. phonebook.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone num- • The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the then dial the corresponding phone number, which
display of certain radios. may appear in the display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the “Phone” button to begin. NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
⬙Call.⬙ • Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• System will prompt you to say the name of the person • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
you want call. ⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
long names helps the voice recognition and is recom-
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
mended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
when vehicle is not in motion.
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.:
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
3
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook ⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
entry, if desired.
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the entry that you wish to edit.
phonebook entry that you are adding.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone- mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
main menu.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
four associated phone numbers and designations.
return to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone • After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
number to a name entry that already exists in the ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a work, mobile or pager. Say the designation you wish
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s to delete.
work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook • After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List deleted.
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook Phone Call Features

The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙ plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
• The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with 3
your cellular service provider for the features that you
phonebook entries.
have.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
Currently in Progress
name and say ⬙Call⬙. NOTE: the user can also exercise
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point.
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
number designation you wish to call. call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
• The selected number will be dialed.
call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
Currently in Progress to section ⬙Toggling Between Two Calls.⬙ To combine two
If a call is currently in progress and you have another calls, refer to section ⬙Conference Call.⬙
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
Place / Retrieve a Call from Hold
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
To put a call on hold, press the ’Phone’ button until you
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The
been placed on hold. To bring the call back from hold,
UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today
press and hold the ’Phone’ button for 1 to 3 seconds.
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either Toggling Between Calls
answer an incoming call or ignore it. If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
Progress
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
time.
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
Conference Call Redial

When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
joined into one conference call. ⬙Redial.⬙
Three-Way Calling • The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
3
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recogni- was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
tion’ button while a call is in progress and make a second be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ sys-
phone call as described in section ⬙Making a Second Call tem.
while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has
Call Continuation
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been joined into one conference call.
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality can
Call Termination be of three types:
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ’Phone’
button. All active calls will be terminated.
• After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or the name of the language you wish to switch to
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of (English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
call to the mobile phone.
language selection.
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
voice commands will be in that language.
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone. NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change op-
eration, you need to re-enter names to the phonebook
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
and re-pair (re-link) phone(s).
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
Vehicles, such as Pacifica, support this approach. Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
UConnect™ System Features
reachable:
Language Selection
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
number for your area.
using,
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system Towing Assistance
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as If you need towing assistance,
follows:
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Towing Assistance.⬙ 3
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
Please refer to the 24-Hour Towing Assistance coverage
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
details in the DaimlerChrysler Corporation 24-Hour
ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
Towing Assistance Program Guide.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system does slightly lower
Paging
your chances of successfully making a phone call as to
To learn how to page, refer to section ⬙Working with
that for the cell phone directly.
Automated Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon- pagers of certain companies which timeout a little too
nect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in soon to work properly with the UConnect™ system.
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
Voice Mail Calling
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to section
⬙Working with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be

This method is designed to be used in instances where used to navigate through an automated customer service
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
keypad while navigating through an automated tele-
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
phony system.
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice- wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging recognition command immediately. For example, if a
service or automated customer service. Some services prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
require immediate response selection, in some instances, aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system. say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you from confirming your choices (e.g. the UConnect™ sys-
wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
play the current confirmation prompt status and you vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
will be given the choice to change it. situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
Phone and Network Status Indicators
The UConnect™ system will provide notification to
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will 3
hear the audio.
inform you if your cellular phone is in roaming status,
has low signal strength, or has a low battery when you Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
are trying to place a phone call. When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise • Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
⬙Mute.⬙
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
⬙Mute-off.⬙ UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
Information Service
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
with one electronic device at a time.
number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc. If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue-
related information. tooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, follow the instruction
Advanced Phone Connectivity
described in your cellular phone user’s manual.
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred to your cellular phone to the UConnect™ • Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
ing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
⬙Setup List Phones⬙.
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙ • When prompted, say ⬙List Phones⬙.
• The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of • A lower priority phone will only be used for the next
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to phone call. After that, the UConnect™ system will
the lowest priority. return to using the highest priority phone present in or
near (approximately with in 30 feet) the vehicle.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
3
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete.⬙
⬙Setup Select Phone.⬙ • You will be asked to say the name of the phone that
you wish to delete. You can either say the name of the
• When prompted, say the phone name of the cellular
phone that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙All⬙ to
phone you wish to use, or say ⬙List Phones⬙ to hear a
delete all the phones.
list of all the phones that have been paired to your
UConnect™ system. To select a phone from the list,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Select.⬙
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™ • low road noise,
System
• smooth road surface,
Voice Recognition (VR)
• fully closed windows,
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• dry weather condition.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
in North American English and Spanish accents, the
away from you.
system may not always work for some.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
• When navigating through an automated system, such
during a voice recognition period.
as, voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
• Performance is maximized under: speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙send.⬙
• low-to-medium blower setting, • Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding • low-to-medium vehicle speed,

names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
• low road noise,
• UConnect™ phonebook name tag recognition rate is
• smooth road surface,
optimized for the person who stored the name in the
phonebook. • fully closed windows, and
3
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be • dry weather condition.
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• Operation from driver seat.
• Even though international dialing for most number
• Performance, such as, audio clarity, echo. and loud-
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
ness to a large degree, rely on the phone and network,
number combinations may not be supported.
and not the UConnect™ system.
Far End Audio Performance:
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
• Audio quality is maximized under: the in-vehicle audio volume.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
Bluetooth Communication Link Power-Up

Cellular phones have been found to occasionally loose After switching ignition key from off to either On or ACC
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this hap- position, or after a reset, you must wait at least five (5)
pens, the connection can generally be re-established by seconds prior to using the system.
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recom-
mended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode.
Reset
In rare instances, it may be necessary to reset the UCon-
nect™ system. The reset feature is exercised by pressing
and holding the ’UConnect™ ’ and ’Voice Recognition’
buttons simultaneously for 15 seconds. Normally, you do
not need to exercise this feature.
3
3
SEATS
10–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The driver’s power seat switches are located on the
driver’s front door trim panel. The bottom switch con-
trols up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt adjustment.
The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment
and the middle switch controls the lumbar adjustment.
10–Way Driver’s Power Seat

WARNING! 4–Way Passenger’s Power Seat

The front passenger’s power seat switches are located on
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. the passenger’s front door trim panel. The bottom switch
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is controls forward and rearward adjustment. The top
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be 3
properly adjusted and you could be injured.
CAUTION!
8–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped Do not place any article under a power seat or
The driver’s power seat switches are located on the impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
driver’s front door trim panel. The bottom switch con- the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
trols up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt adjustment. movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment. path.
Adjustable Head Restraints

Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the head restraint so that the upper edge is as high as
practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, depress the release
tab located at the base of the head restraint and push
down on the head restraint.
Adjustable Head Restraints

Heated Seats — If Equipped Press the switch once to select a heat setting (high or low)
This feature heats the driver, front passenger and second and press the switch a second time in the same direction
row seats. The controls for the front heated seats are to turn the heated seat off. The indicator light will show
located on the door trim panel next to the power seat when LOW or HIGH heat is ON.
switches.
3
Front Heated Seat Switch

The controls for the second row heated seats are located NOTE:
on the center console between the seats. Press the switch • If the lights in the second row heated seat switch begin
once to select a heat setting (high or low) and press the to flash when the switch is pressed, it indicates that the
switch a second time in the same direction to turn the heated seat is not functioning properly and that ser-
heated seat off. The indicator light will show when LOW vice is required. See your authorized dealer for service.
or HIGH heat is ON.
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
2 to 3 minutes.
• The heated seats will turn off when the ignition switch
is turned to the OFF position.
Rear Heated Seat Switches

Second Row Manual Seat Recliner — If Equipped

The recliner mechanism control is on the outboard side of
the seat. To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever,
then push back to the desired position and release the
lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the
seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean 3
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback
has latched.
Seatback Release Lever

NOTE: When using the recliner mechanism with the 3rd
row seat folded down, the second row seat may need to
be adjusted forward to achieve full recline.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped

The adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat.
Pull the bar up and move the seat to the desired position.
Release the bar to lock the seat into position. Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The seat belt might not be properly
adjusted and you could be injured. 3
Second Row Bench Seating — If Equipped

The second row seats may be used with either or both
seatbacks folded forward for additional storage space.
To fold the seat, remove any objects from in front of or on
the seat. Then pull handle located on the seatback and Seatback Release Handle
push the seatback forward. To raise the second row seat, lift up on the seatback and
push rearward until the seatback is latched. Move the
seatback forward to be sure the seatback is fully latched.
4. Pull up on the seatback release lever located on the

CAUTION!
outboard side of the seat labeled “1” and fold the
Be sure there is nothing in front of the second row seatback down.
seat cushion before folding it down. Damage to the
seat may occur.
Second Row Fold & Tumble Seats — If Equipped

The second row seats can be folded and tumbled forward
for easy access to the third seat or rear cargo area.
To fold and tumble the seat, follow these steps:
1. Remove any obstructions from the floor in front of the
seat.
2. Lower the head restraint to its full downward position
and rotate the arm rest to the upright position. Seatback Release Lever
To assure the seatback is latched in the folded position,
3. Move the seat to the full rear position.
additional downward pressure on the seatback may be
required when folding.
5. Pull up on the release handle labeled “2” and lift To relatch the seat, tilt the seat rearward and push down
firmly to tumble the seat fully forward. If the seat firmly to engage the rear attachments. Then lift the
contacts the rear of the front seat, move the front seat seatback release lever labeled “1” and pull the seatback
forward. up to return it to its full upright position.
WARNING! 3
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Third Row Easy Exit — If Equipped

For passengers sitting in the third row seats, the second
row seats can be folded and tumbled forward for easy
exit.
Seat Release Handle
To fold and tumble the seat forward, follow these steps:

1. Pull up on the seatback release handle “1” located on
the back of the seat to fold the seatback down.
Release Strap 2 Location

To relatch the seat, tilt the seat rearward and push down
firmly to engage the rear attachments. Then lift the
seatback release lever labeled “1” and pull the seatback
Release Handle 1 Location
up to return it to its full upright position.
2. Pull the release strap “2” located at the bottom of the
seat to lift and tumble the seat forward.
Third Row Seating — If Equipped WARNING!

The third row seats may be used with either or both
seatbacks folded forward for additional storage space. Do not sit in the 3rd row seat with the second row
seatbacks folded or with the second row seats folded
To fold the seat, remove any objects from in front of or on
and tumbled. In a collision, you could slide under
the seat. Then pull handle located on the seatback and
push it forward.
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. 3
To raise the 3rd row seat, lift up on the seatback and push
rearward until the seatback is latched. Move the seatback
forward to be sure the seatback is fully latched.
CAUTION!
Be sure there is nothing in front of the 3rd row seat
cushion before folding it down. Damage to the seat
may occur.
Seat Release Handle

WARNING! Load Floor — If Equipped

For additional cargo space, the second and third row
• Not all head restraints in this vehicle are the same. seatbacks may be folded forward and the load floor
Head restraints from one seating position should not extended to cover the center console.
be removed and installed in any other seating posi-
tion. In a collision, serious injury or death may result To extend the load floor, follow these steps:
if the proper head restraint is not installed on each
1. Move the second row seats to the full rear position.
seat.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle should not 2. Fold the second and third row seatbacks down.
be used as a play area by children. They could be
seriously injured in a collision. Children should be 3. Pull on the load floor strap and lift the panel from the
seated and using the proper restraint system. driver’s second row seatback over the center console and
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, onto the passenger second row seat.
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer

Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all front seats. The
floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods.
Load Floor Panel

NOTE: Be sure to reattach the strap to secure the load
floor panel when not in use.
Grocery Bag Holders

DRIVER MEMORY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED The memory seat buttons located on the driver’s door
If your vehicle is equipped with memory systems, your will always recall stored settings. The remote keyless
remote keyless entry transmitter or memory seat buttons entry transmitter can be programmed to recall positions
on the driver’s door panel can be used to recall the when the UNLOCK button is pressed. Refer to the
driver’s seat, outside mirrors, adjustable pedals (if following procedure on how to link a remote keyless
equipped) and radio station presets to saved positions. entry transmitter to a position.
NOTE: The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in Park, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
To recall memory positions press memory button number
1 if you are recalling the memory position for driver one
or press memory button number 2 if you are recalling the
memory position for driver two. A recall can be cancelled
by pressing any of the memory buttons during a recall.
When a recall is cancelled, the seat stops moving and a
delay of approximately one second will occur before any
Driver Memory Switches other recalls can be selected.
Your vehicle has been delivered with two remote keyless 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
entry transmitters. One or both transmitters can be linked remove the key.
to either memory position. Up to eight remote keyless
6. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
entry transmitters can be used with your vehicle. The
driver’s door. A light in the button will flash telling you
memory seat system can also accommodate up to eight
that you are in the set memory mode. You have five
transmitters linked to either of the two stored seat
seconds to complete the next step.
3
positions or any combination of the two positions.
7. Within 5 seconds, press and release button 1 or 2 on
To Program Memory Seat Buttons & RKE
the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling you that
Transmitters, Follow These Steps:
the driver memory has been set. A message will also be
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC), indicating a position has been set.
2. Select Remote Linked to Memory from the EVIC and
enter “Yes”. 8. Within 5 seconds, press and release the LOCK button
on one of the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitters. A
3. Use the seat, mirror and adjustable pedal switches to
chime will sound signaling you that the transmitter has
adjust the seat, recliner, side view mirrors and adjustable
been successfully linked. A message will also be dis-
pedals to the desired positions.
played in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
4. Set the radio station presets. (EVIC), indicating the transmitter has been linked.
Repeat the above steps for the second position using the 4. Within 5 seconds, press and release button 1 or 2 on
other driver’s door numbered button and Remote Key- the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling you that
less Entry Transmitter. the driver memory has been set. A message will also be
displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered button are
(EVIC), indicating a position has been set.
pressed, you erase the old memory and store a new one.
5. Within 5 seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
To Disable A Transmitter Link, Follow These Steps:
button on the remote keyless entry transmitters. A chime
1. Select “Remote Linked To Memory” from the Elec- will sound signaling you that the transmitter link has
tronic Vehicle Information Center, Customer Program- been successfully disabled. A message will also be dis-
mable features. played in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC), indicating the transmitter has been disabled.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key. To disable another transmitter from memory positions 1
or 2, repeat steps 1– 4 for each transmitter.
3. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
driver’s door. A light in the button will flash telling you NOTE: This function can be selected using the “Cus-
that you are in the set memory mode. You have five tomer Programmable Features” in the Electronic Vehicle
seconds to complete the next step. Information Center (EVIC) section, Otherwise see your
authorized dealer.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Next, push to the left the safety catch located under the
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull front edge of the hood, near the center.
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
Hood Safety Catch

Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
Hood Release Lever position.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to LIGHTS

close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 15
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
cm (6 inches) and then drop it. This should secure both
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
overhead console. Each light is turned ON by pressing
closed, with both latches engaged.
the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn the light
OFF. The lights also turn on when a door is opened or the
WARNING! dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second
detent.
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is

pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
3
The interior lights will automatically turn off in about 15
minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left
in the Dome light position. Turn the ignition switch ON
to restore the interior light operation.
Map/Reading Lights
Multi-Function Lever Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel

The Multi-Function Lever controls the operation of the Lights
headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam Turn the end of the Multi-Function Lever to the first
selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights, detent for parking light and instrument panel light
the passing lights, and fog lights. The lever is located on operation. Turn to the second detent for headlight, park
the left side of the steering column. light and instrument panel light operation.
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the Multi-Function Lever up
or down.
Dimmer Control
With the parking lights or headlights
on, rotating the dimmer control for the
interior lights on the Multi-Function
Lever upward will increase the bright-
ness of the instrument panel lights.
Multi-Function Control Lever

Dome Light Position Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)

Rotate the dimmer control completely Rotate the dimmer control upward to
upward to the second detent to turn the first detent. This feature brightens
on the interior lights. The interior the odometer and radio display when
lights will remain on when the dim- the parking lights or headlights are on
mer control is in this position. during daylight conditions. 3
Interior light Defeat (OFF) Automatic Headlights

Rotate the dimmer control to the ex- This system automatically turns your headlights ON or
treme bottom “OFF” position. The in- OFF based on ambient light levels. To turn the system
terior lights will remain off when the ON, turn the end of the Multi-Function Lever to the third
doors are open. detent position. When the system is ON, the Headlight
Time Delay feature is also ON. This means your head-
lights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System OFF,
turn the end of the Multi-Function Lever to the OFF
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head- To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switch
lights will come ON in the Automatic mode. while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay inter-
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
headlights or park lights are turned back on or the
Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is on, the
ignition switch is turned on, the delay will be cancelled.
headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal night time If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
driving. will turn off in the normal manner.
Lights-on Reminder NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition of turning the ignition off to activate this feature
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
Fog Lights — If Equipped
when the driver’s door is opened.
The front fog light switch is on the Multi-Function
Headlight Time Delay Lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
for up to 90 seconds, when leaving your vehicle in an out the end of the Multi-Function Lever.
unlighted area.
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the head- Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
lights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will Pull the Multi-Function Lever towards you to switch the
turn off the fog lights. headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever a second time
to switch the headlights to LOW beam.
Turn Signals
Move the Multi-Function Lever up or down and the Passing Light
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
3
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lightly pulling the Multi-Function Lever toward you.
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent. and remain on until the lever is released.
If either light has a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light
when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the fuse
or indicator bulb is defective.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Washers

The wipers and washers are operated by a switch To use the front washer, pull the lever toward you and
on the control lever. The lever is located on the hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
right side of the steering column. Rotate the end the delay range, the wiper will operate for two wipe
of the control lever to select the desired wiper speed. cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to
clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As
long as the lever is held down, the wipers will continue
to operate.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control

Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotate the end of the lever to the second detent for Low
speed wiper operation, or to the third detent for High
speed operation
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
3
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-
tween cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the
first detent position, then turn the end of the lever to
select the desired delay interval. The delay can be regu-
lated from a maximum of approximately 23 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every second. Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The switch on the right side of the steering column also
controls operation of the rear wiper/washer function.
Rotating the center of the switch up to the DEL (Delay)

position or the ON position will activate the rear wiper.
Push the lever forward to initiate the rear wash function
in any of the three positions. The washer pump will
continue to operate as long as the lever is pressed. Upon
release, the rear wiper will cycle two times before return-
ing to the set position.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the front of
the engine compartment on the driver’s side and should
be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the Washer Fluid Reservoir
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
when Low Washer Fluid illuminates in the Electronic
flush out the residual water.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
TILT STEERING COLUMN WARNING!

To tilt the column, pull the lever, located behind the turn
signal control, toward you and move the steering wheel Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
up or down, as desired. Release the lever to lock the moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
steering wheel firmly in place. umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve- 3
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
Tilt Steering Column Control

TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH — IF EQUIPPED

The traction control Indicator, located in the instrument
cluster, will light up when the Traction Control is in use.
To turn the system OFF, press the Traction Control switch
located on center console next to the ash tray, until the
traction control Indicator in the instrument cluster lights
up.
Traction Control Switch

To turn the system back ON, press the switch a second
time until the traction control Indicator turns OFF.
NOTE:
• The traction control Indicator comes on each time the
ignition switch is turned ON. This will occur even if
you used the switch to turn the system OFF.
• The Traction Control system will make buzzing or

clicking sounds when in operation.
REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system is used to help drivers determine if an
obstacle is in the way of the vehicle while it is backing up 3
in addition to the use of inside rearview and outside
mirrors.
When the driver selects Reverse the system scans for
objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in
the rear bumper. Objects can be detected from up to 71
inches (180 cm). A warning display above the rear
Rear Park Assist Indicator
window provides both visible and audible warnings
indicating the range of the object.
WARNING! The system can be turned on or off through the electronic

vehicle information center (EVIC) when the vehicle is in
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when PARK. If the rear park assist system is turned off, a single
using the Rear Park Assist System. Always check chime will sound and the EVIC will display the following
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and message “PARK ASSIST DISABLED”, when the vehicle is
be sure to check for pedestrians, other vehicles, in reverse.
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. NOTE:
Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
or death. to keep the system operating properly.
The display contains two sets of yellow and red LEDs • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
that the driver can see in the rear view mirror. Each side affect the performance of the system.
of the vehicle has its own warning LEDs. The system
provides a visual warning by illuminating one or more If Service Park Assist System appears in the EVIC after
yellow LEDs as the vehicle gets closer to the object. As making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your
the vehicle continues to approaches the object, one red authorized dealer.
LED is illuminated and the system emits a series of short
beeps. The tone will remain constant and both red LEDs
are illuminated once the vehicle is within 12 inches (30.5
cm) of the object.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals
to move toward or away from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel. The adjust-
able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of
driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. 3
The switch is located on the drivers door trim panel next
to the power seat switches.
Adjustable Pedal Switch

Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.

CAUTION!
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R
(Reverse) or when the Speed Control is ON. A message Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
Center (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be ad- to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become
justed when the system is locked out (“Adjustable limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Ad- the adjustable pedal’s path.
justable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with memory seat ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
feature, your remote keyless entry transmitter or memory When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
seat buttons on the driver’s door panel can be used to operation at speeds greater than 30 mph (50 km/h). The
recall the adjustable pedals to saved positions. speed control switches are located on the steering wheel.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidently
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always 3
leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed:

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the “SET” button. Release the accelerator and
Speed Control Switches the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. The
To Activate: CRUISE SET indicator located near the instrument clus-
Push the “ON/OFF” button once and the CRUISE indi- ter odometer will illuminate showing the electronic
cator located near the instrument cluster odometer will speed control is set.
illuminate showing the electronic speed control system is
NOTE: While in the AutoStick mode, Speed Control will
on. To turn the system OFF, push the “ON/OFF” button
only function in third or fourth gear.
again and the system and indicator will turn off.
To Deactivate: is tapped, speed increases so that tapping the button

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the “CANCEL” three times will increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/h), etc.
button or normal braking while slowing the vehicle will
To decrease speed while speed control is set, press and
deactivate the speed control without erasing the memory.
hold the “COAST” button. Release the button when the
Pushing the “ON/OFF” button to the OFF position or
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
turning off the ignition erases the speed memory.
Tapping the “COAST” button once will result in a 1 mph
To Resume Speed:
(2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is tapped,
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
speed decreases.
“ACCEL/RESUME” button. Resume can be used at any
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). To Accelerate For Passing:
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
To Vary the Speed Setting:
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
When the speed control is set, speed can be increased by
pressing and holding the “ACCEL/RESUME” button. NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
When the button is released, a new set speed will be and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
established. is normal.
Tapping the “ACCEL/RESUME” button once will result
in a 2 mph (3 km/h) speed increase. Each time the button
Four speed automatic transmissions will experience a OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED

downshift to 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descend- The overhead console can contain courtesy/reading
ing downhill. This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to lights, an optional universal garage door opener
maintain vehicle set speed. (HomeLink威), storage for sunglasses, optional power
sunroof switches and an optional power liftgate switch.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
3
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
Overhead Console
Courtesy/Reading Lights GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that oper-
reading lights.
ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press a second time gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
to turn the lights off. push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
The lights also turn on when a front door, a rear door or
are needed.
the liftgate is opened. The lights will also turn on when
the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800–
is pressed. 355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
Press the door latch to open the compartment. The door
will slowly rotate to an open position.
WARNING! Programming HomeLink

NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and advised to park outside the garage. Some vehicles may
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
require the ignition switch to be turned to the second (or
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver ⬙accessories⬙) position for programming and/or opera-
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
tion of HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new
3
reverse” feature as required by federal safety stan- battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
dards. This includes most garage door opener mod- device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker
els manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency
door opener without these safety features it could signal.
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and

release only when the indicator light begins to flash or
the EVIC display shows “Channels Cleared” (after 20
seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30
seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two
HomeLink buttons.
Homelink Buttons
WARNING! 2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3

inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons while
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger- keeping the indicator light in view.
ous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
button that you want to train and the hand-held trans-
ous injury or death.
mitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4
3
has been completed.
WARNING! NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers

may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
Your motorized door or gate will open and close procedures noted in the ⬙Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do gramming⬙ section.
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter and the
damage to objects.
EVIC display will show “Channel X Training” (where X
is Channel 1, 2, or 3). Release both buttons after the
indicator light changes from the slow to the rapid flash or
the EVIC display shows “Channel X Trained”.
NOTE: If the EVIC display shows “Did Not Train” If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
repeat steps 2–4. then turns to a constant light continue with ⴖProgram-
mingⴖ steps 6-8 to complete the programming of a rolling
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and
code equipped device (most commonly a garage door
observe the indicator light or the EVIC display. If the
opener).
indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and your device should activate when the 6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
HomeLink button is pressed and released. If the EVIC in the garage, locate the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button. This
display shows “Channel X Transmit” (where X is Chan- can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
nel 1, 2, or 3), programming is complete and your device attached to the motor-head unit.
should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed
7. Firmly press and release the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button.
and released.
(The name and color of the button may vary by manu-
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but- facturer.)
tons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step
step one.
eight.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button. designed to ⬙time-out⬙ in the same manner.
Repeat the ⴖpress/hold/releaseⴖ sequence a second time,
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
programming a gate operator by using the ⬙Program-
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
ming⬙ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
ⴖProgramming HomeLinkⴖ step 3 with the following:
3
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
equipped device.
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but- ⬙cycling⬙ process to prevent possible overheating.
tons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
step one. For questions or comments, please contact while you press and release every two seconds (⬙cycle⬙)
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515. your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
successfully been accepted by HomeLink. The indicator
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
light will flash slowly and then rapidly and the EVIC
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
display will show “Channel X Trained” (where X is
nals to ⬙time-out⬙ (or quit) after several seconds of
Channel 1, 2, or 3). Proceed with ⬙Programming⬙ step
transmission which may not be long enough for
four to complete.
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Using HomeLink HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and
To operate, simply press and release the programmed can be programmed at any time beginning with ⬙Pro-
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the gramming⬙ - step 2.
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
button previously trained, follow these steps:
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions, 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355- NOT release the button.
3515.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds
Erasing HomeLink Buttons and the EVIC display will show “Channel X Transmit”
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3) for 20 seconds and then
buttons cannot be erased but can be ⬙reprogrammed⬙ - change to “Channel X Training”. Without releasing the
note below), follow the step noted: HomeLink button, proceed with ⬙Programming⬙ step 2
• Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:
the indicator light begins to flash and the EVIC display www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
shows “Channels Cleared” (after 20 seconds). Release
both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds.
Security POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies The power sunroof buttons are located between the sun
by following the “Erasing HomeLink Buttons” instruc- visors on the overhead console.
tions in this section.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
3
following conditions:
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Power Sunroof buttons
HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,

Inc.
Press and hold the “OPEN” button rearward to fully Express Open Feature
open the sunroof. The sunroof can be stopped at any The sunroof is equipped with an intermediate stop or
position between closed and full open. Momentarily comfort stop position. This feature is designed to elimi-
pressing the “OPEN” button rearward will activate the nate wind buffeting at vehicle speeds between 20-40 mph
Express Open Feature, causing the sunroof to open (32-64 km/h). To operate this feature, momentarily press
automatically. the “OPEN” button rearward to activate the Express
Open Feature and the glass will automatically stop at the
Press and hold the “VENT” button to open the vent. The
comfort stop position. Pressing the button rearward
sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed
again will fully open the sunroof.
and full vent. To close the sunroof from the vent position,
press and hold the “CLOSE” button forward. Releasing During the Express Open operation, any movement of
the button will stop the movement of the sunroof and the the button will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
sunroof will remain in the partial vent position until the partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
button is pushed forward again. button rearward will activate the Express Open Feature.
NOTE: The power sunroof buttons remain active for up
to 45 seconds after the ignition button has been turned
off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
To close the sunroof, press and hold the “CLOSE” button WARNING!
forward. Again, any release of the button will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open • Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
condition until the button is pushed forward again. the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open
as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof 3
buttons. Such entrapment may result in serious
the sunroof is open.
injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Wind Buffeting ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of There are two 12 volt power outlets located on the
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the instrument panel below the radio. The driver’s side outlet
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the is controlled by the ignition switch and the passenger
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain side outlet is connected directly to the battery. The
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- driver’s side outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with lighter unit (if equipped with an optional Smoker’s
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows Package).
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
The outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key or

battery symbol indicating the power source. The passen-
ger side instrument panel and center console outlets are
powered directly from the battery, items plugged into
these outlets may discharge the battery and/or prevent
engine starting. 3
The passenger side and center console outlets are pro-
tected by an automatic reset circuit breaker. The auto-
matic circuit breaker restores power when the overload is
removed.
NOTE: If desired, the fourth power outlet in the rear
Front Power Outlets cargo area can be converted by your authorized dealer to
A third outlet is located on the back of the front center provide power with the ignition switch in the OFF
console near the floor, and is also controlled by the position.
ignition switch.
A fourth outlet is located on the driver’s side, in the rear
cargo area and is also controlled by the ignition switch.
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CUPHOLDERS

Front Seat Cupholders
CAUTION! The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console. Push down on the forward edge of the
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from console to release the cupholders. Press the cover up
the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e. cellular
phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
when the cupholders are no longer needed.
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers, vacuum
cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more
quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories
still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the
vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage.
Six Passenger Seating Cupholders
Second Row Seat Cupholders On vehicles equipped with six passenger seating the
On vehicles equipped with five passenger seating the second row seat cupholders are located in the forward
second row seat cupholders are located in middle of the edge of the center console located between the second
seatback armrest. Pull down on the armrest to access the row seats. Push down on the forward edge of the console
cupholders. Push the armrest up when the cupholders to release the cupholders. Press the cover up when the
are no longer needed. cupholders are no longer needed. 3
Third Row Seat Cupholders — If Equipped
There are cupholders located in each rear trim panel for
the third row seat passengers.
STORAGE
Console Features
The center consoles may be equipped with a tissue
holder mounted on the underside of the cover. The
bottom of the console bins may also have built in holders
for compact discs or cassette tapes.
Five Passenger Seating Cupholders

Rear Cargo Storage Bin — If Equipped Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
The storage bin is located in the floor of the rear cargo To cover the cargo area:
area. To open lift up on the handle.
1. Fold down the third row seatbacks.
2. Unfold the cargo cover extensions and lock into place.
3. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots
located on the trim panel behind the second row seat-
backs.
4. Grasp the center portion of the cover flap. Pull it over
the cargo area.
5. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover flap into the
slots on the rear trim panel.
6. The liftgate may be opened or closed with the cargo
Rear Storage Bin cover in place.
WARNING! 3. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots
located on the trim panel behind the third row seatbacks.
In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle 4. Grasp the center portion of the cover flap. Pull it over
could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden the cargo area.
stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store
the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger 5. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover flap into the 3
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle slots on the rear trim panel.
when taken from its mounting. Do not store in the 6. The liftgate may be opened or closed with the cargo
vehicle. cover in place.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
Stowed Position
The tie-downs located on cargo area floor and on the rear
1. Fold down the third row seatbacks. trim panels should be used to safely secure loads when
vehicle is moving.
2. Fold the cargo cover extensions to their stowed posi-
tion and lock into place.
WARNING! • Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear

axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or colli- vehicle to sway.
sion a hook could pull loose and allow the child • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured. seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
Use only the anchors provided for child seat dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
tethers.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
WARNING!
can change the vehicle center of gravity and
vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control result- To help protect against personal injury, passengers
ing in personal injury, follow these guidelines for should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
loading your vehicle: cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put use seat belts.
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars. exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the cross bars, press the upper edge of each
3
cross bar button, then move the cross bar to the desired
position. This is can be done with one person standing on
each side of the vehicle, moving the cross bar at the same
time. Once the cross bar is in place, press the lower edge
of the cross bar button to lock it into position.
Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it has
properly locked into position.
Roof Rack
NOTE: To reduce the amount of wind noise when the

CAUTION!
cross bars are not in use, move both cross bars next to
each other towards the rear of the vehicle in the rear most • To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
position. not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity
The tie down holes on the cross bar ends should always of 150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads
be used to tie down the load. Check the straps frequently as evenly as possible and secure the load appro-
to be sure that the load remains securely attached. priately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward
loads. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
WARNING! A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers

raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the to complete depending on road surface conditions.
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
personal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
3
Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
rack.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM

The automatic load leveling system will provide a level
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 䡵 Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
4
䡵 Base Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 䡵 Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
䡵 Premium Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 ▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 䡵 Sales Code RAH—AM & FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player And CD/DVD Changer Controls . . . . 183
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Customer Programmable Features ▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ CD/DVD Changer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Compass Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Mini-Trip Functions — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 182
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For ▫ Operating Instructions — Headphones . . . . . . 211

MP3 Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Operating Instructions — MP3 Player, Portable
䡵 Sales Code RBP—AM & FM Stereo Radio With Walkman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Cassette Tape Player, CD Player, And Optional
▫ Operating Instructions — Video
CD/DVD Changer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Games/Camcorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Tape Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
▫ CD/DVD Changer Operation — If Equipped . 201 Number (ENS/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
䡵 6 Disc CD/DVD Changer (RDV) — If Equipped . 203 ▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In RBB, RAH And RBK
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Operating Instructions — CD/DVD Changer . . 203
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1
▫ Eject (EJT) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
And RBQ Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Operating Instructions — Remote Control . . . . 205
▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Operating Instructions — Video Screen . . . . . . 210
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 216
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button ▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
䡵 Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance . . . . . . . 220
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 4
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 222
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
䡵 Navigation System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System . 223
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
䡵 Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Manual Air Conditioning Operation . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control . . . 232
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . 243
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

CAUTION!
1. Voltage Light
This light monitors the electrical system voltage. Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
The light should turn on momentarily as the damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads (H),
engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on while Pull over in a safe area as soon as possible and stop
driving, it indicates a problem with the charging system. the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
Immediate service should be obtained. turned off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, and 4
2. Temperature Gauge you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera- immediately, and call for service.
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING! 4. Turn Signal Indicators

The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or when the turn signal lever is operated.
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your traveled about one mile with the turn signals on, a chime
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the will sound to alert you to turn the signals off. If either
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure outside light bulb.
Cap paragraph.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when 6. Anti-Lock Light
the ignition switch is in the ON position. This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
The Low Fuel Light will turn on when the fuel level tem. The light will turn on when the ignition
reaches approximately 2 to 4 gallons (7 to 15 liters) switch is turned to the ON position and may
this light will remain on until fuel is added. stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
is not functioning and that service is required. However, system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
the conventional brake system will continue to operate indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. 4
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
tions. The vehicle should have service performed.
7. Brake System Warning Light
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
This light monitors various brake functions,
sary.
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, there
is a low brake fluid level or there is a problem with the
anit-lock brake system.
WARNING! The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger- NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately. 8. Traction Control Indicator — If Equipped
This display indicator illuminates momentarily
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). turned ON.
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair The traction control Indicator will turn on if:
to the ABS system is required.
• The traction control system is in use.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
• The Traction Control switch has been used to turn
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the system OFF.
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless • There is a Traction Control System malfunction.
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
• The system has been deactivated to prevent damage and either “A” or “B” will appear when in the trip
to the brake system due to overheated brake tem- odometer mode. Push in and hold the button for two
peratures. seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilome-
ters. The odometer must be in trip mode to reset.
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the Traction 11. Transmission Range Indicator
Control Light. This is to prevent overheating of the brake This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
system and is a normal condition. The system will remain gear selection. 4
disabled for about 4 minutes until the brakes have
12. AutoStick Light
cooled. The system will automatically reactivate and turn
This display indicator illuminates when the gearshift
off the Traction Control Light.
lever is moved to the AutoStick position.
9. Tachometer
13. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
engine revolutions-per-minute (r.p.m. x 1000) for each
been driven.
gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the
accelerator. U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
10. Trip Odometer Button
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
either of the two trip odometer settings. The word TRIP
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading 14. Cruise Indicator

before and after the service so that the correct mileage can This display indicator shows that the Speed Control
be determined. System is ON.
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To 15. Malfunction Indicator Light
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odom- called OBD that monitors engine and automatic
eter, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then transmission control systems. The light will illu-
push and hold the button until the display resets (ap- minate when the key is in the ON position before engine
proximately 2 seconds). start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key
from OFF to ON, have the condition checked promptly.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged,
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
odometer. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
the odometer reset button to turn the GASCAP message
not require towing.
off. If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. See Section 7 of this
manual for more information.
The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to 19. Oil Pressure Warning Light
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should turn on momentarily when the engine is
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs. started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
16. High Beam Light
continuous chime will sound when this light turns on.
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the Multi-Function lever towards the Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
4
steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low
beam. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
17. Navigation Screen — If Equipped 20. Seat Belt Reminder Light

The navigation system provides maps, turn identifica- When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
tion, selection menus and instructions for selecting a light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check.
variety of destinations and routes. Refer to your “Navi- During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is
gation User’s Manual” for detailed operating instruc- unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or
tions. when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled,
the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on
18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped continuously. Refer to ⬙Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Re-
This light shows the front fog lights are ON. minder System (BeltAlert™)⬙ in the Occupant Restraints
section for more information.
21. Tire Pressure Monitor Warning Light — If tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
Equipped tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
This light will turn on when there is a Low tire may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
pressure condition. The light will remain on Each tire, including the spare, should be checked
until the tire pressure is properly set. The light monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation
will also flash if a problem exist with any tire pressure as specified in the tire and loading information
sensor. The light will flash for approximately three sec- placard and owner’s manual.
onds every 10 minutes or until the problem with the
NOTE: If one of the vehicle active tires has been
sensor is corrected.
replaced by the spare or a wheel rim not equipped with
This light will turn on momentarily as a bulb check when a TPM sensor, the tire pressure monitor warning light
the engine is started. will flash for approximately three seconds every 10
minutes. Repair or replace the tire or sensor as soon as
When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light
possible.
is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly underin-
flated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as
indicated on the tire and loading information placard.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
22. Airbag Light 25. Liftgate Ajar — If Equipped

This light turns on and remains on for 6 to 8 This light turns on if the liftgate is not com-
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition pletely closed.
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected by an authorized 26. Door Ajar Light — If Equipped
dealer as soon as possible. This light turns on if a door is not completely
closed. 4
23. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display — If
Equipped 27. Washer Fluid Light — If Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display This light turns on when the washer fluid level
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) falls below approximately 1/4 filled. The light will
messages. remain on until fluid is added.
24. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If this light is accompanied by a continuous
chime, the engine temperature is critically hot, and
the vehicle should be turned off immediately. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER • LEFT/RIGHT TURN SIGNAL ON (with a continuous

(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED warning chime)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) con-
• INVALID KEY & FOB (with a single chime)
sists of the following:
• PARK ASSIST DISABLED
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
• Tire Pressure Monitor System — If Equipped
• SERVICE IMMOBILIZER (with a single chime)
• Customer programmable features
• KEY FOB BATTERY LOW (with a single chime)
• Compass display
• KEY & FOB PROGRAMMED (with a single chime)
• Mini-Trip functions
• PROGRAM KEY & FOB
Pressing the MENU button will change the displayed
programming features. Pressing the STEP button will • MEMORY #1/#2 POSITION SET (with a single chime)
display the available choices. Pressing the MENU button
• MEMORY #1/#2 POS SELECTED
a second time accepts a selected choice.
• MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED VEHICLE NOT IN
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
PARK (with a single chime)
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
• SET INHIBITED DUE TO MOTION (with a single • PERFORM SERVICE (with a single chime)
chime)
• LEFT/RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR (one or more,
• FOB LINKED (with a single chime) with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• FOB UNLINKED (with a single chime) • LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR (one or more, with
a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• PARK BRAKE ENGAGED (with a single chime)
• DOOR(S) AJAR (with a single chime) 4
• LOW BRAKE FLUID (with a single chime)
• DOOR(S) AND GATE AJAR (with a single chime)
• LOW FUEL (with a single chime)
• LIFT GATE AJAR (with a single chime if speed is
• MENU IN PARK ONLY
above 1 mph)
• LIST # ALERT MESSAGES
• WASHER FLUID LOW (with a single chime)
• UNLOCK TO OPEN LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
• PEDAL ADJUST DISABLED CRUISE ENGAGED
• PUT IN PARK FOR LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
• PEDAL ADJUST DISABLED VEHICLE IN REVERSE
• TOO COLD FOR PWR LIFTGATE (with a single
• CHANNEL 1, 2, OR 3 TRANSMIT (with a single
chime)
chime)
• TOO HOT FOR PWR LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
• CHANNEL 1, 2, OR 3 TRAINING (with a single • TCS ACTIVE (Traction Control System, with a
chime) graphic)
• CHANNEL 1, 2, OR 3 TRAINED (with a single chime) • SERVICE TCS SYSTEM (Traction Control System, with
a graphic and single chime)
• CLEARING CHANNELS
Customer Programmable Features — If Equipped
• CHANNELS CLEARED
Press the MENU button until one of the following
• CHANNELS DEFAULTED display choices appears:
• DID NOT TRAIN Language?
When in this display you may select one of three lan-
• 1,2,3 OR 4 TIRE(S) LOW PRESSURE (Refer to “Starting
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
And Operating, Tire Section”)
computer functions and navigation system. Press the
• 1,2,3 OR 4 TIRE(S) HIGH PRESSURE (Refer to “Start- STEP button while in this display selects English,
ing And Operating, Tire Section”) Francais, or Espanol. As you continue the displayed
information will be shown in the selected language.
• SERVICE TIRE SYSTEM SOON (Refer to “Starting
And Operating, Tire Section”)
• TCS SUSPENDED (Traction Control System, with a
graphic and single chime)
Park Assist System? ON/OFF Auto Door Locks?

When this feature is selected the system scans for objects When this feature is selected, all doors and the liftgate
behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the rear lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches
bumper. Objects can be detected from up to 71 inches 15 mph (25 km/h). Pressing the STEP button when in this
(180 cm). Pressing the “STEP” button while in this display will select “Yes” or “No.”
display will disable/enable the Rear Park Assist System.
Auto Unlock On Exit?
The EVIC will display the following message: PARK
When this feature is selected all the vehicle’s doors will 4
ASSIST DISABLED after the feature has been disabled
unlock when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is
and SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM if there is a prob-
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neu-
lem with the system.
tral) position. Pressing the STEP button when in this
Display U.S. or Metric? display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Pressing the US/M button will change the EVIC, odom-
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st?
eter, navigation system and A/C Control units from US
When this feature is selected only the driver’s door will
to Metric.
unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry
Use factory Settings? unlock button and require a second press to unlock the
When in this display you may select to use the factory remaining locked doors and liftgate. When REMOTE
settings and no programmable features will be offered. UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors and
the liftgate will unlock at the first press of the remote
keyless entry unlock button. Pressing the STEP button Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock?
when in this display will select DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST or When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
ALL DOORS. signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature
Remote Linked To Memory? (Available with
may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock
Memory Seat Only)
feature selected. Pressing the STEP button when in this
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror,
display will select “Yes” or “No.”
and radio settings will return to the memory set position
when the remote keyless entry “Unlock” button is Headlamp Delay
pressed. If this feature is not selected then the memory When this feature is selected the driver can choose, when
seat, mirror, and radio settings can only return to the exiting the vehicle, to have the headlamps remain on for
memory set position using the door mounted switch. 30, 60, or 90 seconds, or not remain on. Pressing the STEP
Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select button when in this display will select 30, 60, 90, or OFF.
“Yes” or “No.”
Headlamp On With Wipers? (Available with Auto
Sound Horn On Lock? Headlights Only)
When this feature is selected a short horn sound will When this feature is selected and the headlight switch
occur when the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is has at least once been moved to the AUTO position, the
pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the headlights will turn on in approximately 10 seconds
flash lights on lock/unlock feature. Pressing the STEP when the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also
button when in this display will select “Yes” or “No.”
turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were Reset Service Distance (Displays Only if Service
turned on in this way. Pressing the STEP button when in Interval was Changed)
this display will select “Yes” or “No.” When this feature is selected the current accumulated
service distance can be reset to the newly selected service
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
interval. Pressing the STEP button when in this display
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
will select “Yes” or “No.”
brightness, refer to “Lights” in this section.
Power Accessory Delay? 4
Service Interval
When this feature is selected, the power window
When this feature is selected a service interval between
switches, radio, hands–free system, DVD video system,
2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6, 000 miles (10 000 km) in 500
power sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for
mile (800 km) increments may be selected. Pressing the
up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned
STEP button when in this display will select distances
off. Opening a vehicle door or liftgate will cancel this
between 2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6, 000 miles (10 000
feature.
km) in 500 mile (800 km) increments.
Easy Exit Seat? (Available with Memory Seat Only)
When this feature is selected, the driver’s seat moves
rearward 5 cm (2 inches) or to the farthest rearward
position if this distance is less than 5 cm (2 inches) when
the key is removed from the ignition switch so that the
driver can more easily exit the vehicle. The seat will large metal or metallic objects, the “COMPASS CALI-
return to the memorized seat location (if REMOTE LINK BRATING” EVIC message will turn off and the compass
TO MEMORY is set to YES) when the remote keyless will function normally.
entry transmitter is used to unlock the door. Pressing the
Manual Compass Calibration
STEP button when in this display will select “Yes” or
If the compass appears erratic and the “COMPASS CALI-
“No.”
BRATING” message does not appear in the EVIC display,
Compass Display — If Equipped you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode
This display provides one of eight compass readings to manually.
indicate the direction the vehicle is facing.
To put into a Calibration Mode: Turn on the ignition
Automatic Compass Calibration switch and set the display to Compass. Press the RESET
This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the button for at least 10 seconds until the “COMPASS
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is CALIBRATING” message appears. Release the RESET
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will button and complete one 360° turn in an area free from
display “COMPASS CALIBRATING” until the compass large metal objects. The “COMPASS CALIBRATING”
is calibrated. The compass will calibrate automatically message will turn off and the compass will function
after approximately 40 seconds if no buttons are pressed normally.
and the vehicle is in Park. You may also calibrate the
compass by completing one 360° turn in an area free from
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from 4
the overhead console.
To set the variance: Turn the ignition switch ON and set • Off Mode
the display to Compass. Press the RESET button for Shows a blank display.
approximately 5 seconds but no more than 10 seconds.
• Step Button
The “COMPASS VARIANCE” message and the last vari-
Push this button to cycle through all the Mini-trip
ance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP
functions.
button to select the proper variance zone as shown in the
map. Press the RESET button to set the new variance To Reset The Display
zone and resume normal operation. Pressing and releasing the Reset button once will clear
the resettable function currently being displayed. The
Mini-Trip Functions — If Equipped
resettable function is average fuel economy. Reset will
This displays information on the following:
only occur if the resettable function is currently being
• Average Fuel Economy (ECO AVG) displayed.
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. The
minimum average fuel economy that will be displayed SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
on reset is 0.3 mpg. To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
• Distance To Empty (DTE) correct.
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined using the MPG for the last few minutes.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK SALES CODE RAH—AM & FM STEREO RADIO

WITH CD PLAYER AND CD/DVD CHANGER
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
CONTROLS
the radio. A digital readout shows the time in hours and
minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position and the time button is pressed.
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, or when
the radio frequency is being displayed, time keeping is 4
accurately maintained.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position
and press the time button. Using the tip of a ballpoint pen
or similar object, press either the hour (H) or minute (M)
buttons on the radio.
RAH radio
2. Press the H button to set hours or the M button to set
minutes. The time setting will increase each time you
press a button.
Radio Operation Program Type Radio Display

Power/Volume Control Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the Classical Classicl
volume control clockwise to increase the volume. Classic Rock Cls Rock
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through College College
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position Country Country
to operate the radio. Information Inform
PTY (Program Type) Jazz Jazz
Pressing the INFO button once while in FM mode will Foreign Language Language
turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds. If no action is taken News News
during the 5 second time out, the PTY icon will turn off. Nostalgia Nostalga
Pressing the TUNE button within 5 seconds will allow Oldies Oldies
the program format type to be selected. Many radio Personality Persnlty
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information. Public Public
Toggle the TUNE button to select the following format Rhythm and Blues R&B
types: Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Program Type Radio Display If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Rock Rock Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck Mode
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B Press the MODE button to select between, AM, FM, CD,
Sports Sports CD/DVD changer or the Satellite Radio (if equipped).
When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) is selected “SA” 4
Talk Talk
will appear in your radio display.
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather A disc may remain in the radio while in the Satellite or
radio mode.
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Seek
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
function only operates when in the FM and Satellite (if station in either the AM, FM or Satellite mode. Press the
equipped) modes. top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down.
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If make another selection. Holding the button in will by-
no station is found with the selected PTY program type, pass stations without stopping until you release it.
the radio will return to the last preset station.
Tuning Tone Control

Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or The Bass and/or Treble controls sound for the desired
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button, tone. Press the AUDIO button, select Bass or TREBLE,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the then press SEEK + or SEEK ⫺ to increase or decrease
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu- amplification of the band.
ously updated while the button is pressed.
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
Balance When you are receiving a station that you wish to
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal- commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
ance. Press the AUDIO button, select BALANCE, then SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
press SEEK + or SEEK ⫺ to adjust the balance. push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a station is not selected within
Fade
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
and rear speakers. Press the AUDIO button, select FADE,
memory.
then press SEEK + or SEEK ⫺ to adjust the fade balance.
You may add a second station to each push-button by 2. This device must accept any interference received,
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press including interference that may cause undesired opera-
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display tion.
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push-
button twice. CD Player Operation 4
To Change From Clock To Radio Mode NOTE:
Press the TIME button to change the display between • The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
radio frequency and time. position and the volume control ON before the CD
player will operate.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with • This Radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
following conditions: discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
Inserting The Compact Disc Seek

Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
CAUTION! beginning of the current selection, or return to the
This CD player will accept only 4–3/4 inch (12cm) beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage first 10 seconds of the current selection.
the CD player mechanism. EJT — Eject
Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF. to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to
the radio mode.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out. The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.
If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD FF/TUNE/RW
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
display will show the track number and index time in fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track button works in a similar manner.
one.
RND — Random Play CD/DVD Changer Operation

Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate Press the MODE button to select between the CD player
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the and the optional remote CD/DVD changer.
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
Time
change of pace.
Press the TIME button to change the display from
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly elapsed CD or DVD playing time to time of day.
selected track. 4
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward file recording media and formats are limited. When
feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing. tions.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Supported media (disc types)
Play. The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Supported medium formats (file systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Supported MP3 file formats
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
• Maximum number of files: 255 sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
• Maximum number of folders: 100
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: not play the file.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
3-character extension) an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
3-character extension)
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. VBR bit rates.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre- Playback of MP3 files

Bit rate (kbps) When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
cation quency (kHz)
320, 256, 224, radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128, contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
48, 44.1, 32 time to start playing the MP3 files.
Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
160, 128, 144, by the following:
MPEG-2 Audio 112, 96, 80, 64, 4
24, 22.05, 16
Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
16, 8 CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not to load than non-multisession discs
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not increase with more files and folders
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio RW/FF (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Play) Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection. Press the RW side of the button to
SEEK Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
move back through the MP3 selection.
Pressing the SEEK + button plays the next MP3 File.
Pressing the SEEK ⫺ button plays the beginning of the AM/FM Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
MP3 file. Pressing the button within the first ten seconds Switches back to Radio mode.
plays the previous file.
RND Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) Pressing this button plays files randomly.
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 disc. The
DIR Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Press the DIR Button to display folders, when playing an
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure. Press DISC
able).
up (button 1) or DISC down (button 5) to move through
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed the folders. Press the SET button to select a folder
time⬙ priority mode.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If SALES CODE RBP—AM & FM STEREO RADIO
Equipped) WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER, CD PLAYER,
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s AND OPTIONAL CD/DVD CHANGER CONTROLS
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES威) (If Equipped)
Refer to 6 Disc CD/DVD Changer (RDV) section of the 4
Owner’s Manual.
RBP Radio
Radio Operation Program Type Radio Display

Power/Volume Control Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the Classical Classicl
volume control to the right to increase the volume. Classic Rock Cls Rock
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through College College
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position Country Country
to operate the radio. Information Inform
PTY (Program Type) Button Jazz Jazz
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for Foreign Language Language
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time News News
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button Nostalgia Nostalga
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to Oldies Oldies
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broad- Personality Persnlty
cast PTY information. Public Public
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format Rhythm and Blues R&B
types: Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Program Type Radio Display If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Rock Rock Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck Pressing PTY, then SCAN will scan the FM Band and stop
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B at all RDS stations that broadcast the station type. Each
Sports Sports RDS station will be played for a 5 second scan once
around the FM Band and stop at the last station. The PTY 4
Talk Talk
icon will then turn off.
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
function only operates when in the FM and Satellite (if make another selection. Holding the button in will by-
equipped) modes. pass stations without stopping until you release it.
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last preset station.
Scan Fade
Press and release the SCAN button to search for the next The Fade control provides for balance between the front
station in either the AM or FM mode. The radio will and rear speakers. Press the FADE button in and it will
pause for 5 seconds at each listenable station before pop out. Adjust the balance and push the button back in.
continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the
Tone Control
SCAN button a second time.
The tone controls affect the BASS and TREBLE frequency
Tune bands. Each is controlled by a slider control with a detent
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or at the mid position. Moving a control up or down
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button, increases or decreases amplification of the band. The mid
the radio will continue to tune until you release the position provides a balanced output.
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
AM/FM Selection
ously updated while the button is pressed.
Press the AM/FM button to toggle between AM and FM
Balance — BAL mode. The operating mode will be displayed next to the
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal- station frequency. The display will show “ST” when a
ance. Press the BAL button in and it will pop out. Adjust stereo station is received (FM only).
the balance and push the button back in.
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the To set the clock, use a ballpoint pen or similar object to
“1–5” button you wish to lock onto this station and press press the hour (H) or minute (M) buttons on the radio,
and release that button. If a button is not selected within The time setting will increase each time you press the
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will button. Press any other button to exit from the clock
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button setting mode.
memory.
General Information
You may add a second station to each push-button by This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with 4
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display following conditions:
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The 2. This device must accept any interference received,
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by including interference that may cause undesired opera-
pressing the push-button twice. tion.
Time NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-
Press the TIME button to change the display between proved by the party responsible for compliance could
radio frequency and time. void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Tape Player Operation Seek

Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
right and the mechanical action of the player will gently tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
pull the cassette into the play position. selection.
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures, Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm number to skip forward or backward 1 to 7 selections.
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and move 2 selections, etc. the display will show the total
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year. number of times the SEEK button was pushed. The SEEK
function will be cancelled by pressing either the FF/RW
Tape Side — ⵜ⌬/PTY
or AM/FM button.
Pressing the ⵜ⌬ button during tape mode will cause the
other side of the tape to be played. The display will Fast Forward — FF
confirm the selected tape play direction. The time is Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
always displayed. in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
Tape
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
Press the TAPE button to select the Tape mode.
opposite direction.
Rewind — RW the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
Press the RW button down momentarily to reverse the tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
tape direction. The tape will rewind until the button is and the tape will resume play.
pressed again or until the beginning of the tape is
Dolby Noise Reduction
reached. At the beginning of the tape, the tape will play
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on when-
in the opposite direction.
ever the tape player is on, but may be switched
EJT Tape on/off. 4
Press the EJT TAPE button and the cassette will disen-
To turn the Dolby Noise Reduction System on/off: Press
gage and eject from the radio.
the Dolby NR button (button 2) after you insert the tape.
Metal Tape Selection (70µs) The NR light in the display will go off when the Dolby
If a standard 70 µ (metal) tape is inserted into the player, System is off.
the player will automatically select the correct equaliza-
* ”Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license
tion.
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
Pinch Roller Release and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-
If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch are turned ratories Licensing Corporation.
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
CD Player Operation Seek

Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
will operate.
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
Inserting The Compact Disc first second of the current selection.
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
Scan
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio off, Press the SCAN button to play 10 seconds of each
the display will show CD and the time of day will be selection. Press the SCAN button a second time to cancel
displayed. this feature.
If the power is on, the unit will switch from radio to CD EJT CD
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The Press the EJT CD button and the disc will unload and
display will show the track number and index time in move to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track switch to the radio mode.
one.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The unit will continue in radio mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition off.
FF/TUNE/RW To select Satellite Radio (if equipped), press the MODE

Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to button until the word SIRIUS™ appears. The following
fast forward until FF is released. The RW (Reverse) will be displayed in this order: After three seconds, the
button works in a similar manner. current channel name and number will be displayed for
five seconds. The current program type and channel
Random Play — RND/Program Button 4
number will then be displayed for five seconds. The
Press the RND (button 4) button while the CD is playing
current channel name and number will then be displayed
to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections 4
until an action occurs. A CD or tape may remain in the
on the compact disc in random order to provide an
player while in the Satellite Radio mode.
interesting change of pace.
Time
Press the top of the SEEK button to move to the next
Press the TIME button to change the display from
randomly selected track.
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.
Press the RND (button 4) button a second time to stop
CD/DVD Changer Operation — If Equipped
Random Play.
MODE
MODE
Press the MODE button to select between the CD player,
Press the MODE button to select between the CD player,
and the CD/DVD changer (if equipped).
remote CD/DVD changer (if equipped), or satellite radio
(if equipped).
Disc Up/Program Button 1 Disc Down/Program Button 5

Press the DISC (button 1) button to play the next avail- Press the DISC (button 5) button to play the previous
able disc. disc.
Random Play — RND/Program Button 4 Seek
Press the RND (button 4) button while the CD is playing Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
on the currently playing compact disc in random order to beginning of the current selection, or return to the
provide an interesting change of pace. beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
Press the top of the SEEK button to move to the next
randomly selected track. Time
Press the TIME button to switch between time of day and
Press the RND (button 4) button a second time to stop
CD track time.
Random Play.
Scan
FF/RW — TUNE
Press the SCAN button to play 10 seconds of each track.
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
Press the SCAN button a second time to cancel the
hold the RW button for fast reverse. The audio output can
feature.
be heard when fast forward and fast reverse are acti-
vated.
6 DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (RDV) — IF EQUIPPED

The Rear Seat Audio/Video System allows passengers to
listen to a CD or DVD from the 6 disc CD/DVD changer
through wireless headphones, while the front seat pas-
sengers listen to either AM/FM, Cassette or CDs from the
radio speakers. A remote control is provided for func-
tions such as changing tracks or DVD functions, as well
as selecting discs loaded in the 6 disc CD/DVD changer 4
while listening to the Rear Audio/Video System.
The Rear Seat Audio/Video System may be available in a
base and premium version. The premium version in-
cludes a six disc changer, remote control and two sets of 6 Disc CD/DVD Changer
wireless headphones. The base version includes a single
Operating Instructions — CD/DVD Changer
disc changer and remote control.
Loading The CD/DVD Changer
The CD/DVD Changer will play CD-R, CD-RW, CD-
The premium version has a multi-disc changer,
Audio and DVD Video disc formats.
and will accept up to six discs. The base
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC version is a single-disc changer, and will only
position before the CD/DVD changer will operate. accept one disc.
To insert disc(s) into the changer, follow the instructions 4. Repeat the process for loading any additional CD/
shown: DVDs into the premium version multi-disc changer. The
CD/DVD changer will stop while additional CD/DVDs
1. On vehicles equipped with the premium version,
are loaded.
select and press any numbered button without an illumi-
nated light above it. If the radio volume control is ON, the unit will switch
from radio to CD/DVD mode. If the DVD supports the
2. Gently insert the disc with the label facing up while
autoplay feature, play will begin automatically in ap-
the light below the loading slot is illuminated. On
proximately 10 seconds, after the DVD disc menu is
vehicles equipped with the premium version the light
displayed. If the DVD does not play automatically, press
above the chosen button will also be flashing, indicating
the ENTER button on the remote control or on the side of
which numbered position the disc will be loaded into.
the video screen to select play from the menu options.
The disc will automatically be pulled into the CD/DVD
The radio display will show the chapter number and
changer.
index time in hours and minutes of the DVD, or the track
3. Upon insertion, the disc will begin to play, and the number, minutes and second of the CD.
light below the loading slot will turn off. On vehicles
NOTE:
equipped with the premium version the light above the
• You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
chosen button will remain illuminated.
• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio To eject additional discs from the premium version
OFF, the DVD will automatically be pulled into the multi-disc changer, first select the numbered button
DVD changer and the display will show the time of where the disc is located and then press the EJT button.
day.
The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.
• It is recommended to label home made burned discs
Operating Instructions — Remote Control
with a permanent marker instead of adhesive labels.
These types of labels may become loose and cause the NOTE: Aim the remote control at the DVD changer 4
disc to be stuck in the DVD player. This may cause located on the center of the instrument panel and press
permanent damage to the DVD mechanism. the desired button. Direct sunlight or objects blocking the
line of sight may affect the function of the remote control.
EJECT (EJT) Button
If there is a disc in the changer, press the EJT button and
the disc will eject. If you do not remove the disc within 10
seconds, it will be reloaded and the display will show
PAUSE. The radio mode will continue to operate.
Remote Control Buttons

1. Headphone Transmitter
2. Menu Up/Next Track/Chapter
3. Menu Left/Fast Rewind
4. Return
5. Setup
6. Pause/Play
7. Mute
8. Display
9. Mode
10. Program Down - Previous Disc
11. Program Up - Next Disc
12. Slow
13. Stop
14. Menu
15. Menu Down/Previous Track/Chapter
Remote Control
16. Menu Right/Fast Forward
Remote Control Buttons RTN Button (4)

17. Enter This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button to return to the previous menu when in the DVD
18. Light
disc menu mode.
Headphone Transmitter Button (1)
SETUP Button (5)
After a disc is inserted into the DVD changer, both the
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press the
headphone transmitter button (1) on the remote control
button after pressing the STOP button to access the DVD 4
and the power button on the headphones must be turned
changer set up menu. Use the right and left arrows to
ON before sound can be heard from the headphones. On
move between tabs for language, rating, mark, audio and
some radios the headphone symbol will flash for ap-
aspect. Use the up and down arrows to move between
proximately 5 seconds in the radio display, indicating the
options within each tab.
headphones are in use.
To change an item highlighted in blue, press ENTER. This
ARROW Buttons (2, 3, 15, 16)
should cause the highlight to turn yellow. Again, using
These buttons only function in DVD video mode. Use the
the up and down arrows will cause the arrow to move up
arrow buttons to toggle through the DVD disc menu
or down. Once the arrow is on the desired selection, press
screen options.
ENTER. When finished, press setup or play to return to
playing the DVD or Menu to return to the DVD disc
menu.
PAUSE/PLAY Button (6) SLOW Button (12)

This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button once to pause the video, press a second time to button to advance the video. If the DVD is paused,
play the video. pressing this button will advance the video frame by
frame.
MUTE Button (7)
No function. STOP Button (13)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
DISP Button (8)
button to stop the DVD.
This button only functions in DVD video mode. When a
DVD video is playing, press this button to display the MENU Button (14)
play menu options. This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button to select the DVD disc menu.
MODE Button (9)
No Function
PROG UP/DOWN Buttons (10, 11)
PROG UP selects the next disc loaded in the changer.
PROG DOWN selects the previous disc loaded in the
changer.
NEXT/PREV Buttons (2, 15) ENTER Button (17)

Press the up arrow or the NEXT button for the next This button only functions in DVD video mode. Use the
chapter or track on the disc. Press the down arrow or ENTER button to enter selections from the menu screens.
PREV button to return to the beginning of the current Use the arrow buttons to toggle through the menu screen
chapter or track. Press the down arrow or PREV button options.
twice within two seconds to return to the previous
Light Button (18)
chapter or track. Each press of the NEXT/PREV button
Pressing this button illuminates the buttons on the re- 4
up or down will toggle through the chapters or tracks.
mote control.
FF/RW Buttons (3, 16)
Remote Control Battery Service
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) once and the CD/DVD
changer will begin to fast forward until the FF button is • To replace the batteries for the remote control slide the
released. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar cover rearward.
manner.
The replacement batteries for the remote control are two
AAA batteries.
Operating Instructions — Video Screen 2. Enter Button

Push up on the release button to lower the video screen. This button will enter the selection from the
on-screen menu.
3. Brightness Button
Changes the brightness of the screen picture.
Lowering Video Screen

1. Screen Width Button
Changes the width of the screen picture.
Operating Instructions — Headphones
Video Screen Controls

Headphone Controls
1. Power Button
2. Volume Control
3. Power Indicator
Power Button
Pressing the power button will turn the headphones
ON/OFF. An indicator light will illuminate on the head-
phone earpiece to indicate the headphones are ON.
NOTE:
• The headphones will turn off automatically in ap-
proximately 3 minutes if they lose the signal form the
system or when the radio or rear audio/video system
is turned off.
Volume Control
Rotate the volume control to adjust the volume to the
desired listening level. Headphone Battery Service
• Replace the battery in each earpiece and reinstall the
Headphone Battery Service
cover. The headphones require two AAA batteries.
• Press the button at the bottom of each headphone
earpiece and lift the cover upward.
General Information 3. Direct sunlight or objects blocking the line of sight

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and between the headphone transmitter on the video screen
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the and the headphones.
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
Operating Instructions — MP3 Player, Portable
harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any
Walkman
interference received, including interference that may
An MP3 player can be connected to the audio system.
cause undesired operation.
Connect the cables to the RCA jacks located on the front 4
If you do not hear sound coming from the headphones, of the CD/DVD changer.
check for the following conditions:
NOTE: Follow the manufactures instructions for the
1. Rear Seat Audio/Video System and headphones are correct colors when connecting the RCA cables.
on. Press the headphone transmitter button (1) on the
Operating Instructions — Video
remote control and the power button on the headphones.
Games/Camcorders
An indicator light will illuminate on the headphone
A video game unit or camcorder can be connected to the
earpiece to indicate the headphones are ON.
rear audio/video system. Connect the cables to the RCA
2. Weak batteries in the headphones. jacks located on the front of the CD/DVD changer.
NOTE: To operate a video game unit a DC to AC System Activation

adapter may be required, plug the adapter into any To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
power outlet. toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following informa-
Follow the manufactures instructions for the correct
tion available when activating your system:
colors when connecting the RCA cables.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
NOTE: MP3 player’s, video game systems, camcorders
Number (ESN/SID).
connected to the RCA jacks and CD’s or DVD’s inserted
into the CD/DVD changer can be heard through the 2. Credit card information.
headphones.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast- Number (ENS/SID)
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel- ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
lite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music, system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil- steps:
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
ESN/SID Access With RBB, RAH and RBK Radios mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
the radio OFF, press the Tape Eject or CD Eject (depend- was pushed.
ing on the radio type) and Time buttons simultaneously
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBB, RAH and RBK
for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the twelve-digit
Radios
ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press the SEEK UP
Press the MODE button repeatedly until ⬙S A⬙ appears in
button to display the next four digits. Continue to press
the display. A CD or tape may remain in the radio while 4
the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/SID digits have
in the Satellite radio mode.
been displayed. The SEEK DOWN will page down until
the first four digits are displayed. The radio will exit the Selecting Satellite Mode in RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1
ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the and RBQ Radios
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word
button was pushed. ⬙SIRIUS⬙ appears in the display. These radios will also
display the following:
ESN/SID Access With RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1 and
RBQ Radios • After 3 seconds, the current channel name and channel
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and number will be displayed for 5 seconds.
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
• The current program type and channel number will
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-
then be displayed for 5 seconds.
bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
• The current channel number will then be displayed NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
until an action occurs. can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539-
7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock-
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
ing. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
Satellite radio mode.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
Selecting a Channel
In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre-set stations, you
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for
may also commit 10 satellite stations to push button
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
the button is released.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
equipped)
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
radio.
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ Satellite Antenna

When the desired program type is obtained, press the To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7 roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
channel of the selected program type. Press the ⬙SCAN⬙ decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
button a second time to stop the search. placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna.
NOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button while 4
performing a music type scan will change the channel by Reception Quality
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory following reasons.
channel and stop the search.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ structure or under a physical obstacle.
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
form of short audio mutes.
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can The following describes the left hand rocker switch
cause signal blockage. operation in each mode:
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS Radio Operation

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o’clock listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
positions. will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The right hand rocker switch has a push button in the The button located in the center of the left hand switch
center and controls the volume and mode of the sound will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase programmed in the radio pre-set push-button.
the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch Tape Player
will decrease the volume. Pressing the center button Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM to selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the
Tape or CD mode depending on which radio is in the switch once will go to the beginning of the current
vehicle. selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it
The left hand rocker switch has a push button in the is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
center. The function of the left hand switch is different If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
depending on which mode you are in. second selection, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
function in this mode.
Radio Broadcast Signals
CD Player Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help 4
after the current track begins to play. you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
nals.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
Two Types of Signals
function in this mode.
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbances remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition

Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude, will cancel this feature.
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
carry the FM signal. To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception 1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin-
and neon signs. ished.
FM Reception 2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from

Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia- slackness and dust when it is not in use.
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations 3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear, and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
which is the major feature of FM radio.
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
NOTE: On vehicles so equipped the radio, steering adhering flat to the cassette.
wheel radio controls and 6 disc CD/DVD changer will
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions. following precautions:
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape surface.
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap 4
wiping from center to edge.
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from 3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were disc; avoid scratching the disc.
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
or antistatic sprays.
WET cleaning cassette.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
too high.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES The navigation DVD unit is located in the underfloor
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being On in storage compartment in the rear cargo area. A single disc
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from containing map information for the entire United States
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated and parts of Canada is stored in the DVD unit. Updated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition DVD’s are available from your authorized dealer.
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The navigation system provides maps, turn identifica-
tion, selection menus and instructions for selecting a
variety of destinations and routes. The buttons to operate
the system are located on the instrument panel next to the
analog clock.
Refer to your Navigation User’s Manual for detailed
operating instructions. Navigation CD Location
To replace the navigation map DVD lift the storage bin Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
cover and liner in the rear cargo area, press the eject
button and the disc will eject. Gently insert the new disc
into the DVD unit with the label facing up. The disc will
automatically be pulled into the DVD unit.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to 4
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Heating and A/C Controls

Power Button
When the “POWER” button is pressed the indicator will
illuminate and the blower will run at the speed selected
by the front blower control. When the button is pressed a
second time the indicator light turns off, the blower will Dual Zone Temperature Control — If Equipped
turn off and the system will be positioned in the recircu- With the Dual Zone Temperature Control System, each
lation mode. front seat occupant can independently control the tem-
perature of air coming from the outlets on their side of
Blower Control
the vehicle.
The Blower controls the amount of air delivered to
the passenger compartment. There are four blower
speeds.
The fan speed increases as you
move the control clockwise.
Dual Zone Temperature Control

This is accomplished by having a separate temperature
control lever for both the driver and front seat passenger.
The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures
while the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
Mode Control Panel Mode

The mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution.
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system

allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots.
Panel Outlets
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each Bi-Level Mode
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. Moving the air vane knob on the center
outlets down, will close off the air flow from the center
outlets. The thumbwheel next to the outboard outlets can
be rotated to regulate or shut off the air flow from these
outlets.
Bi-Level Outlets
Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost. A slight amount of air is also directed
through the side window demister outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature lever positions, the bi- Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the directed through the defrost and side window demister
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. outlets.
Floor Mode Mix Mode
Floor Outlets Mix Outlets

Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy outlets. Use this setting when necessary to defrost your
conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable while keep- windshield and side windows.
ing the windshield clear.
NOTE: For improved safety, the compressor is activated
Defrost Mode and the recirculation mode is deactivated when Mix or
Defrost modes are selected. This is done to assist in
drying the air and it will help in keeping the windows
from fogging.
Manual Air Conditioning Operation
To turn on the air conditioning, set the front
blower control to any speed and press the A/C
button which is located next to the recirculation
button. An indicator light on the A/C button shows that
the air conditioning is on.
NOTE: The indicator light in the “POWER” button must
be on for the climate control system to operate.
Defrost Outlets
Cool dehumidified air comes through the outlets selected Economy Mode
by the Mode Control. To turn off the air conditioning, If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
press the A/C button a second time. The indicator light off the indicator light, and the A/C compressor. Move the
will turn off. temperature control lever to the desired temperature.
NOTE: Recirculation Control
• The compressor will not engage until the engine has Press the recirculation button to recirculate the
been running for a few seconds. air inside the vehicle. This is located next to the 4
A/C button. An indicator light on the button
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
shows that air is being recirculated. Use the
expected, check the A/C air filter and the front of the
recirculation mode to rapidly cool the inside of the
A/C condenser for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
vehicle. The recirculation mode can also be used to
The A/C condenser is located in front of the radiator.
temporarily block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.
The A/C air filter is located under the instrument
panel on the passenger side. NOTE:
• When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the recircula-
• Fabric type fascia protectors tend to block the amount
tion feature will be cancelled.
of air to the condenser and may reduce air condition-
ing performance.
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may keep odors from building up within the air conditioner-
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation heater housing. It is recommended that the recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to mode be used as little as possible, especially in humid
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation climates.
will be disabled automatically if these modes are
For hot and dry climates, or people who are allergic to
selected.
pollen and find frequent use of the recirculation mode
• If the recirculation button is pressed while in the Mix necessary, the recirculation mode can be programmed to
or Defrost mode, the indicator light in the recirculation not automatically reset to the outside mode by using the
button will flash 3 times indicating that recirculation is following procedures:
not allowed.
• Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
A/C Recirculation Programming
• Set the mode control to “PANEL”.
The recirculation control is programmed to cancel the
recirculation mode when the ignition key is turned OFF • Depress and hold in the “POWER” button.
and will reset to outside air mode when the ignition key
• Start the engine, and continue to hold in the “POWER”
is turned ON. The frequent use of outside air will help
button until the indicator light starts flashing repeat-
edly.
• Press the recirculation button until the indicator light 1. Pressing the recirculation button twice within two
remains lit. seconds will temporarily disable this feature. When the
ignition switch is turned OFF, the recirculation mode will
• The selection will be stored when the ignition switch is
be enabled the next time the ignition switch is turned
turned OFF or if the “POWER” button is pressed.
ON.
If the recirculation indicator light is lit, the recirculation
2. You can disable this feature permanently by following
mode will not reset when the engine is started. If the
the procedure below: 4
recirculation indicator light is not lit, the recirculation
mode will reset to the outside air mode when the engine • Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
is started. The programmed status can be changed back
• Set the mode control to “BI-LEVEL”.
and forth by following the above mentioned procedure.
• Depress and hold in the “POWER” button.
As additional protection against odor build-up in the air
conditioner-heater housing, the recirculation control will • Start the engine, and continue to hold in the
automatically bring in a small amounts of outside air, if “POWER” button until the indicator light starts
the recirculation feature is on for more than 10 minutes. flashing repeatedly.
You can disable this feature by using one of the following • Press the recirculation button until the indicator
procedures: light remains lit.
• The selection will be stored when the ignition switch front seat occupant comfort, even under changing out-
is turned OFF or if the “POWER” button is pressed. side weather conditions.
If the recirculation indicator light is lit, the recirculation
mode is enabled. If the recirculation indicator light is not
lit, the recirculation mode is OFF. The programmed status
can be changed back and forth by following the above
mentioned procedure.
Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
The Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
System automatically maintains the interior comfort level
desired by the driver and front seat passenger. This is
accomplished by using two infrared sensors located in
the center of the instrument panel. The two infrared
sensors independently measure the surface temperature Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
of the driver and front seat passenger. Based on the
sensor input, the system automatically adjusts the air
temperature, the airflow volume, the airflow distribu-
tion, and amount of inside air recirculation to maintain
To operate the system, press either the ⬙AUTO HI⬙ or NOTE:

⬙AUTO LO⬙ buttons. The system now automatically • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
regulates the heating and air conditioning system includ- cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
ing blower speed, outlet air temperature, and airflow the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
distribution through the various outlets within the in- comfort as quickly as possible.
strument panel. Using the ⬙TEMP⬙ buttons, adjust the
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric by
temperature you would like the system to maintain.
selecting the US/M customer programmable feature. 4
When the system is set to your comfort level, it is not
Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center-
necessary to change the settings. You will experience the
Customer Programmable Features” in Section 3 of this
greatest efficiency by allowing the system to function
manual.
automatically. The system will operate fully automati-
cally in either ⬙AUTO HI⬙ or ⬙AUTO LO⬙. The ⬙AUTO To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
LO⬙ setting will limit the maximum fan speed and should mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
be used when more quiet operation is desired. Use the off and “DELAY” will appear in the display until the
⬙AUTO HI⬙ setting when the quickest cool-down or engine warms up. An estimate of the time remaining
warm-up performance is desired. until the “DELAY” is complete will appear periodically
in the display. However, the fan will engage immediately
if the defrost mode is selected or by pushing the blower
switch and manually adjusting the fan speed.
This feature may be disabled using the following proce- Dual/Single Zone Operation
dure: When ⬙DUAL⬙ is displayed in the ATC control unit, the
driver and passenger air outlet temperatures can be
• Press and hold the Heated Rear Window and Auto LO
individually adjusted from the two independent ⬙TEMP⬙
buttons for 5 seconds.
buttons. When a front seat passenger is not present,
• The “DELAY” symbol will flash to indicate that the pressing the ⬙DUAL⬙ button will match the passenger’s
feature as been disabled. temperature setting to the driver’s temperature setting.
This will help equalize air outlet temperatures across the
This feature may be enabled using the following proce-
left and right side of the instrument panel. The outside
dure:
temperature will replace the passenger’s temperature
• Press and hold the Heated Rear Window and Auto HI setting in the display. Pressing the ⬙DUAL⬙ button a
buttons for 5 seconds. second time or adjusting the passenger’s ⬙TEMP⬙ button
will return the system to dual independent temperature
• The “DELAY” symbol will flash to indicate that the
operation.
feature as been enabled.
Power Button
This button turns the entire system ON/OFF. When the
system is turned on it will return to the previous settings.
Manual Operation The front blower control can be set to any fixed
This system offers a full complement of manual override blower speed by pressing the rocker switch up or
features. The indicator light in both the ⬙AUTO HI⬙ or down. This allows the front occupants to control the
⬙AUTO LO⬙ buttons will turn off when the system is volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the auto
being used in the manual mode. The fan speed, airflow mode. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until
distribution, and outside air/recirculated air can be additional speeds are selected or until either the ⬙AUTO
manually adjusted. HI⬙ or ⬙AUTO LO⬙ buttons are pressed. The system will
continue to automatically adjust air temperature and 4
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
airflow distribution.
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
the remaining features will continue to operate automati- The operator can also select the direction of the air by
cally. pressing the mode control rocker switch located to the
left of the A/C button and selecting one of the following
positions.
Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. Moving the knob up, down, left, or right will
direct the air accordingly. The thumbwheel next to each
outlet can be rotated to reduce or shut off the air flow
from these outlets.
Panel Outlets
Bi-Level Mode Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is also directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the bi-level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
4
Bi-Level Outlets
Floor Mode Mix Mode
Floor Outlets Mix Outlets

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
directed through the defrost and side window demister demist outlets. This mode is not used when operating in
outlets. either ⬙AUTO HI⬙ or ⬙AUTO LO⬙. This mode should be
used when airflow to the floor and windshield is desired.
Defrost Mode NOTE: While operating in ⬙AUTO HI⬙ or ⬙AUTO LO⬙,

the system will not automatically sense the presence fog,
mist, or ice on the windshield. The defrost button must be
pressed to clear the windshield and side glass.
Depress the “A/C” button to turn on and off the
air conditioning during manual operation only.
Cool dehumidified air comes through the outlets 4
selected by the Mode Control. To turn off the air condi-
tioning, press the A/C button a second time. The A/C
symbol in the display will turn off.
NOTE: If a fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, press the “A/C” button to engage the com-
Defrost Outlets pressor or press the defrost button. If a fog or mist on the
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist windshield or side glass starts to impair visibility, press
outlets. Use this setting when necessary to defrost your the front blower button and increase the fan speed to
windshield and side windows. If a fog or mist on the maximum.
windshield or side glass starts to impair visibility, press
the front blower button and increase the fan speed to
maximum.
Recirculation Control key is turned “ON”. The frequent use of outside air will
When the outside air contains smoke, odors, help keep odors from building up within the air
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired conditioner-heater housing. It is recommended that the
you may wish to recirculate interior air by recirculation mode be used as little as possible, especially
pressing the recirculation button. The recircu- in humid climates.
lation mode should only be used temporarily. The recir-
For hot and dry climates, or people who are allergic to
culate symbol will illuminate in the display when this
pollen and find frequent use of the recirculation mode
button is selected. Push the button a second time to allow
necessary, the recirculation mode can be programmed to
outside air into the vehicle.
not automatically reset to the outside mode by using the
NOTE: In cold weather, use of the recirculation mode following procedures:
may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
• Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will • Press and hold the recirculation button.
be disabled automatically if these modes are selected.
• While holding the recirculation button, turn the igni-
A/C Recirculation Programming tion switch to the “RUN” position.
The recirculation control is programmed to cancel the
• Continue holding the recirculation button for 4 sec-
recirculation mode when the ignition key is turned OFF
onds, then release.
and will reset to the outside air mode when the ignition
The recirculation control is now programmed so that the ATC display reads ⬙REAR⬙, only the rear seat occupants
recirculation mode will not reset to the outside air mode can control the rear fan speed from the rear switch. When
when the engine is restarted. The recirculation program- in the “REAR” mode, the rear occupants can set the rear
ming can be changed back by repeating this procedure. switch to any fan speed including ⬙OFF⬙, or ⬙AUTO⬙.
While in the ⬙AUTO⬙ position, the rear fan speed will be
Rear Fan Operation
automatically controlled.
To operate the rear fan, press the ⬙REAR⬙ button. The first
time this button is pressed the ⬙REAR AUTO⬙ display Summer Operation 4
will illuminate indicating that the rear fan speed is The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
automatically controlled. To manually control the rear must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
fan speed, press the ⬙REAR⬙ button again and only to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
⬙REAR⬙ will illuminate in the display. This allows the rear against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
seat occupants to control the rear fan speed using the glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
switch located in the center console between the second to section 7, Maintenance Procedures, of this manual for
row seats. By pressing the ⬙REAR⬙ button a third time, proper coolant selection.
the rear fan will shut off.
When the ATC display reads ⬙REAR AUTO⬙ or when the
rear fan is off, the switch located in the center console
between the second row seats is not functional. When the
Winter Operation Window Fogging

To insure the best possible heater and defroster perfor- Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function- or humid weather. To clear the windows, use the A/C
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen- button to reduce the humidity inside the vehicle.
tration of coolant is used. Refer to section 7, Maintenance
Fogging on the inside of the windshield can be quickly
Procedures, of this manual for proper coolant selection.
removed by pressing the defrost button and increasing
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
the blower speed.
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging. Do not use the Recirculation mode without the A/C
button for long periods as fogging may occur.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service Outside Air Intake
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi- Before driving, always make sure the air intake located
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions
air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate such as leaves, ice, or snow, which could reduce airflow
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com- and/or plug the water drain tube inside the plenum.
pressor damage when the system is started again.
A/C Air Filter the button will illuminate to indicate the rear window
The climate control system filters out dust, pollen and defroster is ON. The defroster automatically turns off
some odors from the air. Strong odors can not be totally after about 10 minutes of operation.
filtered out. Refer to section 7 “Air Conditioning” for
filter replacement instructions.
CAUTION!
Outside Temperature Display
The outside temperature can be shown in the ATC To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
4
display by pressing the ⬙OUTSIDE TEMP⬙ button. After rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
pressing this button, the front seat passenger’s tempera- instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
ture setting display will be replaced with the current interior surface of the window.
outside temperature. Press the ⬙OUTSIDE TEMP⬙ button Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
again or press the passenger’s ⬙TEMP⬙ button to return water.
the display to the passenger’s temperature setting.
Electric Rear Window Defroster
Press this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated side mirrors. A light in
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 ▫ AutoStick Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 ▫ AutoStick General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 250 䡵 All Wheel Drive — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . 251 䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Four Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . 252
䡵 Traction Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
䡵 AutoStick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 䡵 All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 281

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 267 䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System — If Equipped . . . 281
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 268 ▫ 1,2,3, Or 4 Tire(s) Low Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 282
䡵 Tires—General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 ▫ 1,2,3, Or 4 Tire(s) High Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 ▫ Service Tire Pressure System/See Owner’s
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 276
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 277
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 ▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . . 292

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 ▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 ▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 ▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 298
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 5
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . 292
STARTING PROCEDURES Normal Starting

Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
CAUTION! pedal. Turn the key to the “START” position and release
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high when the engine starts. If the engine has not started
engine speeds, can cause excessive exhaust tempera- within 3 seconds, slightly depress the accelerator pedal
tures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start
your vehicle unattended with the engine running. within 15 seconds, turn the key to the “OFF” position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting
procedure.
WARNING! Extremely Cold Weather (below ⫺29°C or ⫺20°F) To
insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
Do not leave animals or children inside parked externally powered electric engine block heater (available
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat build up may from your dealer) is recommended.
cause serious injury or death.
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK

position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
WARNING! If Engine Fails to Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get “NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
transmission cannot be started this way. Un- hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear
burned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
once the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
CAUTION!
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery 5
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
in another vehicle. This type of start can be engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
dangerous if done improperly. See section 6 of 15 seconds before trying again.
this manual for the proper jump starting proce-
dures and follow them carefully.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
have enough power to continue running when the key is
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to
causing serious personal injury.
the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the key once The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the engine is running smoothly. Do not overspeed en- the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
gine. is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “NORMAL STARTING” procedure WARNING!
should be repeated.
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
After Starting Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine cause electrocution.
warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING!

It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
CAUTION! “N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow- your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
ing precautions are not observed: vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
a complete stop.
the engine is idling normally and when your right
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the foot is firmly on the brake pedal. 5
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
into any forward gear when the engine is above of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
idle speed. pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot switch is in the ACCESSORY or ON position. Always
is firmly on the brake pedal. depress the brake pedal first, before moving the gear
selector out of PARK.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System Reset Mode - Electronic Transmission

This system prevents the key from being removed unless The transmission is monitored electronically for abnor-
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of mal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
PARK unless the key is in the ACCESSORY or ON damage, the transmission automatically shifts into sec-
position. ond gear. The transmission remains in second gear
despite the forward gear selected. Park (P), Reverse (R),
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
and Neutral (N) will continue to operate. This Reset
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
service without damaging the transmission.
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service. In the event that the problem has been momentary, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears.
Four Speed Automatic Transmission
The electronically controlled transmission provides a • Stop the vehicle and shift into Park (P).
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
• Turn the key to OFF then restart the engine.
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal • Shift into the desired range and resume driving.
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is “N” Neutral

recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest Engine may be started in this range.
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equip-
“D” Overdrive
ment to determine if the problem could recur.
To be used for most city and highway driving, it provides
If the transmission cannot be reset, dealer service is smoothest upshifts and downshifts and best fuel
required. economy. When frequent transmission shifting occurs
while using the “D” Overdrive position, such as when
Gear Ranges
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions,
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
(i.e. in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds or 5
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick mode and
“P” Park select the “3” range.
Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis-
NOTE: Using the “3” range in the AutoStick mode
sion. The engine can be started in this range. Never
while operating the vehicle under heavy operating con-
attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
ditions will improve performance and extend transmis-
Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range. sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
“R” Reverse
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
AUTOSTICK You can shift in or out of the autostick mode at any time
Autostick is a driver-interactive transmission that offers without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you
manual gear shifting capability to provide you with more choose the Overdrive mode, the transmission will oper-
control. Autostick allows you to maximize engine brak- ate automatically; shifting between the four available
ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and gears. When you wish to engage autostick, simply move
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can the shift lever to the AUTOSTICK position. The transmis-
also provide you with more control during passing, city sion will remain in the current gear until an upshift or
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, downshift is chosen.
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Move the lever back to the Overdrive position to shift out
Autostick Operation of the Autostick mode.
The Autostick position is just below the Overdrive posi-
Autostick General Information
tion and is identified by the word “AUTOSTICK”. When
you place the shift lever in the Autostick position, it can • The transmission will automatically upshift from first
be moved from side to side. Moving the lever to the left to second gear and from second to third gear when
(-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. engine speed reaches about 6300 RPM.
The gear position will be shown in the transmission gear
• Downshifts from third to second gear above 74 mph
display, located in the instrument cluster.
(119 km/h) and from second to first gear above 41
mph (66 km/h) will be ignored.
• You can start out in first, second, or third gear. Shifting • If the system detects a problem it will disable the
into fourth gear can occur only after vehicle speed Autostick mode and the transmission will return to the
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first ALL WHEEL DRIVE — IF EQUIPPED
gear when coming to a stop. This feature provides full time, on-demand, All Wheel
• Starting out in third gear is helpful in snowy or icy Drive (AWD). The system is automatic with no driver
conditions. inputs or additional driving skills required. Under nor-
mal driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of
• While in the Autostick mode, Speed Control will only the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction, 5
function in third or fourth gear. power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The
Downshifting out of third gear will turn off the speed greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the
control. power transfer to the rear wheels.
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the

transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking

CAUTION!
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
All wheels must have the same size and type tires. Park position. To release the parking brake, pull out on
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire the parking brake release located on the left side of the
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit instrument panel.
and/or the viscous coupling.
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch on, the brake light in the instrument cluster will
turn on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Parking Brake Release

When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking WARNING!

brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may • Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan-
make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As an gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb could be injured. Children should be warned not
on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
grade. gear selector lever. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
The parking brake should always be applied when the
other controls, or move the vehicle.
driver is not in the vehicle. 5
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving: failure to do so can lead to brake
failure, and an accident.
BRAKE SYSTEM Anti-Lock Brake System

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
example, repeated brake applications with the engine stability and brake performance under most braking
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
with the power system operating. wheel lock-up.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic WARNING!
systems lose normal capability, the remaining
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
system will still function. There will be some
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
slow down or stop.
activation of the Brake Warning Lamp.
WARNING! The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake

System. The light will come on when the
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu- ignition switch is turned to the ON position
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
can it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including the conventional brake system will continue to operate
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
5
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
can prevent accidents. as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others. If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function-
ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some end of the stop.
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h). WARNING!
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in- electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose interference caused by improperly installed or high
debris, or panic stops. output radio transmitting equipment. This interfer-
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
You also may experience the following when the brake
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
system goes into Anti-lock:
performed by qualified professionals.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
• the clicking sound of solenoid valves, type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
• brake pedal pulsations,
POWER STEERING WARNING!

The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability Continued operation with reduced power steering
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
steering capability if power assist is lost. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
If for some reason, the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering CAUTION!
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during 5
parking maneuvers. Prolong operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering fluid temperature and should be avoided when
wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
that there is a problem with the power steering system. occur.
TRACTION CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

The Traction Control System reduces wheel slip and
maintains traction at the driving (front) wheels. The
system reduces wheel slip by engaging the brake on the
wheel that is losing traction (spinning). The system will
operate at speeds below 35 mph (56 km/h).
The system is always in the “stand by” mode unless,
• The Traction Control Switch has been used to turn the
system OFF
Traction Control Switch

• There is a Traction Control System malfunction
• The system has been deactivated to prevent damage to
the brake system due to overheated brake tempera-
tures
NOTE: TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

• The Traction Control system will make buzzing or
Tire Markings
clicking sounds when in operation.
• Extended heavy use of Traction Control may cause the
system to deactivate and turn on the traction control
indicator located in the instrument cluster.
This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and
is a normal condition. The system will remain disabled
for about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled. The 5
system will automatically reactivate and turn off the
traction control indicator.
• If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, ice, or snow,
turn the Traction Control System OFF before at-
tempting to “rock” the vehicle free. NOTE:
• P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/65R15 95H.
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European • Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. • High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric standards and begins with the tire diameter molded
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Milimeters (mm) 5
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load
index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified
operating conditions. (ie. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire.
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire 5
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location.(2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size.(2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer.(1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure

Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure for pas-
senger cars is listed on either the face of the driver’s door
or the driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than
passenger cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed
on either the “B” pillar, the Certification Label or in the
Tire Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compart-
ment.

Tire and Loading Information Placard 4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of 5
this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
Tire and Loading Information
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
This placard tells you important information about GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the
the: Vehicle Loading section of this manual.
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
the weight referenced here. calculated in step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu- trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on manual to determine how this reduces the available
your vehicle’s placard. cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. NOTE: For the following example the combined weight
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (since 5 x 150 = 750, Kg).
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lb.)
5
WARNING! 1. Safety—
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never accidents.
overload them. • Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
Tire Pressure • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and You could lose control of your vehicle.
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary • Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or
left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
2. Economy— Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire Information” section of this manual.
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. 5
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars
is listed on either the face of the driver’s door or the
driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than passenger
cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either
the “B” pillar, the Certification Label or in the Tire
Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as (1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to sure molded into the tire side wall.
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
CAUTION! 12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
the winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1mile
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) WARNING!

during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low. High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very mph (120 km/h).
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle 5
loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial-Ply Tires Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
WARNING! radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle stalled at the first opportunity.
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case WARNING!
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires. Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in (80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your tread life. When two or more tread wear indicators
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs. appear in adjacent grooves, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings which apply to your spare. Failure to do so
could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle
control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare. on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
on the vehicle at any given time.
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
CAUTION! tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on vehicle
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take at the first opportunity. 5
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
WARNING! WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first what the speed.
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
Tire Spinning to help you in determining when your tires should be
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not replaced.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section
6 of this manual.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found 5
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, han-
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread dling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi-
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced. cations or capability.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen-
ings.
sion dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and brak-
ing of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable Alignment And Balance
handling and stress to steering and suspension com- Poor suspension alignment may result in:
ponents. You could lose control and have an accident
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire • Fast tire wear.
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle. • Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, wear.
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
control and have an accident. Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
for proper diagnosis.
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration. TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM — IF
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of- EQUIPPED
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPM) system uses
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear. wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic
sensors to monitor tire pressure levels (EXCLUDING
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED THE SPARE TIRE). Sensors, mounted to each wheel as
part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to
CAUTION! the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) display
in the instrument cluster.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles must have the same 5
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
size and type tires on all wheel positions. Unequal tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and too main-
tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size may tain the proper pressure.
cause failure of the power transfer unit and/or the
viscous coupling. When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
1,2,3, OR 4 TIRE(S) LOW PRESSURE SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM/SEE

Low tire pressure levels of 26 psi [1.79 bars] (179 kPa) or OWNER’S MANUAL
less detected in one or more tires. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPM) system requires
service.
Inspect all tires for proper inflation pressure, once the
proper tire pressure has been set, the TPM system See your authorized dealer for service.
warning will reset automatically when the vehicle has
been driven for at least 2 minutes at or above 20 mph (32
km/h).
1,2,3, OR 4 TIRE(S) HIGH PRESSURE
High tire pressure levels of 45 psi [3.10 bars] (310 kPa) or
more detected in one or more tires.
Inspect all tires for proper inflation pressure, once the
proper tire pressure has been set, the TPM system
warning will reset automatically when the vehicle has
been driven for at least 2 minutes at or above 20 mph (32
km/h).
• The TPM system is not intended to replace normal tire

CAUTION!
care and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire
The TPM system has been optimized for the original failure or condition.
equipment tires and wheels. TPM system pressures • The TPM system should not be used as a tire pressure
have been established for the tire size equipped on gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sen-
sor damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or CAUTION!
style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage.
Do not use tire sealant or balance beads if your After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al- 5
vehicle is equipped with a TPM system, as damage ways reinstall the valve stem cap, if equipped. This
to the sensors may result. will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the wheel rim
sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPM system can inform the driver of a low tire
pressure condition of 26 psi [1.79 bars] (179 kPa) or
less, or high a tire pressure condition of 45 psi [3.10
bars] (310 kPa) or more.
General Information TIRE CHAINS

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
following conditions: proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123

Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and

CAUTION!
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following on dry pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s
precautions: instructions on method of installation, operating speed,
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and and conditions for usage.
other suspension components, it is important that only
chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest
occurs that could indicate chain breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the chain before further use. a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
• Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains. 5
then retighten after driving about 1⁄2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h). SNOW TIRES
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
especially with a loaded vehicle. during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
• Do not use on rear wheels of All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles.
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement. designation on the tire side wall.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on the
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for
use. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
chain manufacturer if different than the speed recom- in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
mended by the manufacture. safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
km/h). sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS formed.
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at shown in the following diagram.
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world

Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis- have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-
sions regulations and provide satisfactory tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define
fuel economy and performance when us- fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,
ing high quality unleaded gasoline having engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The
an octane range of 87 to 89 or higher. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet
manufacturer recommends the use of 89 the WWFC specifications if they are available.
octane for optimum performance.
Reformulated Gasoline
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner 5
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
required.
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard prove air quality.
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
ering service for the vehicle.
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends MMT In Gasoline

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen- blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
your vehicle. to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
CAUTION! content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
these blends may result in starting and driveability his/her gasoline contains MMT.
problems and may damage critical fuel system com- It is even more important to look for gasolines without
ponents. MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. lated gasolines.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
Materials Added to Fuel • An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
detergents or other additives are not needed under some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
normal conditions and would result in additional cost. malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Therefore you should not have to add anything to the Contact your dealer for service assistance.
fuel.
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
Fuel System Cautions octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol. 5
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
CAUTION! resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s the responsibility of the manufacturer.
performance: NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. against you.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
WARNING! the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. windows fully open.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon • Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
monoxide poisoning: prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill. ADDING FUEL
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
stopped in an open area with the engine running for be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster

CAUTION!
will turn on. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened
Damage to the fuel system or emission control each time the vehicle is refueled.
system could result from using an improper fuel • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap tank is full.
could let impurities into the fuel system.
WARNING!
CAUTION! • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near 5

the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top tank filled.
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle • Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
NOTE: portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. could be burned. Always place gas containers on
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly the ground while filling.
tightened. If the gas cap is not secured properly the
VEHICLE LOADING • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown in the
• Type of Vehicle
charts that follow. This information should be used for
passenger and luggage loading as indicated. • Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo, do not The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Vehicle Certification Label Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
of the driver’s door. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
The label contains the following information:
GVWR.
• Name of manufacturer
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
• Month and year of manufacture The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front rear GAWR.
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
WARNING! Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle, evenly over the front and rear axles.
it is important that you do not exceed the maximum Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
control of the vehicle and have an accident. GVWR.
Loading
Overloading 5
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
and rear GAWR.
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
The best way to figure out the total weight of your have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
is not over the GVWR. on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that Example Only Front Rear Axle
neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been Axle
exceeded. Empty Weight 2538 lbs 2076 lbs
(1151 kg) (942 kg )
Load (Including driver, pass- 223 lbs 890 lbs
sengers and cargo) (101 kg) (404 kg)
Total 2762 lbs 2968 lbs
(1253 kg) (1346 kg)
GAWR 2826 lbs 3035 lbs
(1282 kg) (1377 kg)
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements Towing Requirements

and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
• The maximum frontal area of the trailer cannot exceed
hicles used for trailer towing.
40 square feet (3.72 square meters).
Perform maintenance services as prescribed in the main-
• The trailer tongue load must be considered as part of
tenance schedules manual. When your vehicle is used for
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
trailer towing, never exceed the gross axle weight rating
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
(GAWR) by the addition of:
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–
• The tongue weight of the trailer. Safety Information Section in this manual.
5
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment • The “D” range can be selected when towing. However,
put in or on your vehicle. if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3”
range must be selected.
• Remember that everything put in or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle. NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
Tongue weight must be equal to at least 10% of Gross
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
Trailer Weight (GTW), but no more than 15% of GTW.
sive shifting and heat build up.
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact • For vehicles equipped with Autostick. By using the
spare tire. Autostick modes, and selecting a specific gear range,
frequent shifting can be avoided. The highest gear
• Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
range should be selected that allows for adequate
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
performance. For example, choose “4” if the desired
recommended for motoring safety.
speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed
• The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be to maintain the desired speed.
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more
• Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
than 45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
“B” in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
change intervals.
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
NOTE: speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
• Check the automatic transmission fluid level before
towing. Fluid discoloration, or a burnt odor, shows the
need for a transmission fluid and filter change.
MAXIMUM TRAILER A load equalizing hitch is recommended for loaded

WEIGHT trailer weights above 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for
TRAVEL CONDITION Trailer Frontal Area Not weights above 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
To Exceed 40 Square
Feet (3.72 Square Meters)
CAUTION!
3.5/3.8L ENGINES
MAX. COMBINED If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
WEIGHT OF VEHICLE loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
AND TRAILER NOT TO should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
EXCEED 8,600 lbs (3900 5
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
kg) brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
UP TO 2 PERSONS & 3,500 lbs (1600 kg)
LUGGAGE
3 TO 4 PERSONS & 3,000 lbs (1360 kg)
LUGGAGE
5 TO 6 PERSONS & 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
LUGGAGE
WARNING! RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Connecting trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
brake lines can overload your brake system and
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you
ground)
need them and could have an accident. Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 ▫ With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 6
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 ▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures If Battery Is Low . . . . 309
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 With A Tow Dolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers, depress the
The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the switch on the instrument panel. When the Hazard Warn-
instrument panel above the center air outlets. ing Switch is activated, all directional turn signals will
flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emer-
gency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flash-
Hazard Flasher Switch
ers may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 301
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

CAUTION!
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac- Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
tion. your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
• On the highways — Slow down. over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed. the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down service.
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to 6
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING! JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or WARNING!

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your • Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
System Pressure Cap paragraph. to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location Remove the scissors jack and jack handle by rotating the
small wing nut to the left.
Five Passenger Seating
The jack and jack-handle are stowed in the rear storage
bin located behind the second row bench seat. Pull up on
the storage bin cover to access the jack and jack tools.
Jack Wing Nut
Jack Location
Six Passenger Seating Spare Tire Stowage

The jack and jack-handle are stowed in the rear storage
Five Passenger Seating
bin located in the rear cargo floor. Pull up on the storage
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
bin cover and liner to access the jack and jack tools.
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under the plastic cover at
the center rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the
liftgate opening.
Six Passenger Seating
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under the trim cover at the
center of the rear storage bin in the rear cargo floor.
Jack Location
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable and pull it through the center of the wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
6
Lowering Spare Tire slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
Spare Tire Removal selector in PARK. Turn OFF the ignition.
Fit the jack-handle over the drive nut. Rotate the nut to
the left until the spare is on the ground with enough slack
cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the
vehicle.
WARNING! Jacking Instructions

1. Remove the spare wheel, scissors jack and jack-handle
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the from stowage.
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when 2. Carefully pry off the wheel center cap if equipped,
operating the jack or changing the wheel. using the tip of the jack handle.
3. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher. turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
• Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally oppo- 4. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
site the jacking position. For of the body — refer to the following illustration.
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the
jack is securely engaged. Never jack up the vehicle
using any suspension components.
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
6
Jack Engagement Locations Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
5. These locations are on the sill flange on the underside the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
of the body. The jack is to be located, engaging the hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
flanges, 20 cm (8 inches) inward from the edge of the to remove the tire.
wheel opening closest to the wheel to be changed. Place
the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right until
the jack head is properly engaged in the described
7. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Correct
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not wheel nut tightness is 130 N·m (95 ft. lbs). If in doubt
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub. about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
8. Install the spare wheel, for vehicles with wheel covers,
align the notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on 11. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
the wheel. Install the cover on the wheel by hand only
and install the wheel lug nuts with the cone shaped end WARNING!
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
lowered. hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact
spare.
12. Secure the flat or spare tire as follows:
Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel covers.
• If your vehicle is equipped with cast aluminum
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
wheels, the center cap of the wheel must be re-
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the moved prior to flat tire stowage. Store the center cap
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate inside the glove box or other storage compartment.
• Turn the wheel so that the valve-stem is down. Slide NOTE: When reinstalling the wheel center cap, insure
the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel that the valve stem symbol on the back of the cap is
and position it properly across the wheel opening. pointed toward the wheel valve stem. Install the center
cap using hand pressure only. Do not use a hammer.
• For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation,
stow with the valve-stem toward the rear of the JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES IF BATTERY IS
vehicle. LOW
• Using the jack-handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the wheel is drawn into place against the WARNING!
underside of the vehicle.
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
• Continue to rotate the nut until you hear the mecha- the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition 6
nism click three times. It cannot be overtightened. switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
Push against the tire several times to be sure it is
securely in place.
13. Stow the jack and jack handle.
14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure as required.
WARNING! 1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry

such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it inadvertent electrical contact.
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis-
sion cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could 2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach and
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake,
the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type
place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the
of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow ignition switch to the OFF position for both vehicles.
this procedure carefully.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow
battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean loads.
over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps 4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin,
flush contaminated area immediately with large quan- terminal of the discharged battery. Connect the other end
tities of water. of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster
• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable battery.
and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the vent
holes. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output that exceeds 12 volts.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal WARNING!

of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger-
a good contact on the engine. ous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the front wheels. You could lose control of the
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
Traction
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a 6
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
Acceleration surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip- partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati- ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when tions should be observed:
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels. 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles. WARNING!

3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
visible.
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
4. Keep tires properly inflated. age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE what the speed.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the CAUTION!
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and Drive. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
wheels is most effective. can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 35 mph (55 km/h).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE All Wheel Drive

Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
With Ignition Key
tions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the
Front Wheel Drive distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles (160
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi- km), the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72
tions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the km/h), and both front and rear wheels must be on the
distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles (160 ground. If your vehicle must be towed farther or at a
km), the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72 higher rate of speed, it must be transported on a flat bed
km/h), and both front and rear wheels must be on the truck.
ground. Exceeding these towing limits may cause a
transmission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not
operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 100 6
miles (160 km), the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels off the ground.
All Transmissions If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed

(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the
CAUTION! transmission remains in NEUTRAL.
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front Without The Ignition Key
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
front fascia will result. with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only ap-
• Always use wheel lift equipment when towing proved method of towing with out the ignition key is
from the front. The only other approved method with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-
of towing is with a flat bed truck. sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
the rear sheet metal, liftgate and fascia will occur. VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another ground)
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans- Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
mission may result. transmission, is only permitted within the limitations
described in this section.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER

VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLEY
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow an
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) or front wheel drive vehicle on a
tow dolley. Vehicle damage may occur.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 3.5L Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
䡵 3.8L Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 322 ▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . 330
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 ▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 7
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 ▫ Master Cylinder — ABS Brakes Brake Fluid
Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Fuel System Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Steering Shaft Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . . 352
▫ Steering Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders . . . 358
▫ Windshield And Rear Window Washers . . . . . 339
䡵 Integrated Power Module (IPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 345
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Standard Quad Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) — If ▫ License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal And Sidemarker
䡵 Recommended Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Back-Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
7
3.5L ENGINES
Engine Compartment 3.5L Engines

3.8L ENGINES
Engine Compartment 3.8L Engines

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
transmission control systems. When these systems are emission control system. It could also affect fuel
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
sions well within current government regulations. formed.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system • If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
also store diagnostic codes and other information to verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Immediate service is required.
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can PROGRAMS
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message will an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication
For states which have an I/M (Inspection and
that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
reset button to turn the message off. If the problem
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
persists, the message will appear the next time the
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
for testing.
turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL light off. Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently 7
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do ignition key or start the engine. This means that your
the following: vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start
or start the engine.
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
this test over.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
bulb check. you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
happen:
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is DEALER SERVICE

ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on include detailed service information for your vehicle.
with the engine running. Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in- systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures against you.
caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty. 7
WARNING! could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.

These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
You can be badly injured working on or around a observed or suspected.
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which Engine Oil
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform Checking Oil Level
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
mechanic. be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
services determined by the engineers who designed your starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
vehicle. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance. dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
Change Engine Oil

Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to see if any apply to you.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
• Stop and Go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
Engine Oil Dipstick • More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C). 7
CAUTION!
• Trailer towing.
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. • Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service).
• Off-Road or desert operation.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months, Identification Symbol
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the This symbol means that the oil has
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual. been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
manufacturer only recommends
at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ of the ⬙Mainte-
API Certified engine oils.
nance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.5 Liter
Engine Oil Selection Engines
For best performance and maximum protection under all The proper SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should be
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only selected based on the following recommendation and be
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet within the operating temperature shown in the engine oil
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard viscosity chart.
MS-6395.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.8 Liter

Engines
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Refer to your engine
oil filler cap for the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
the Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
• SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred. SAE 5W-30 engine ber should not be used.
oil is allowed during cold weather only to improve 7
cold weather starting.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils governmental agency for advice on how and where used
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
Engine Oil Filter
such a product, use only those oils that are American
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified and have the recom-
oil change.
mended SAE viscosity grade. Follow the maintenance
schedule that describes your driving type. Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacture’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-
are recommended.
ditives.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
belts should be checked for condition and proper tension.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks, or Engine Air Cleaner Filter
glazing, and replaced if there is indication of damage Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at
which could result in belt failure. Low generator belt the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you
tension can cause battery failure. drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con-
ditions, the filter element should be inspected periodi-
Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interfer-
cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on
ence between the belts and other engine components.
Schedule “B”.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor- WARNING!
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata- cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
lytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
7
plugs, refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Informa- engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
tion” label in the engine compartment. the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Fuel Filter
CAUTION!
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting. Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
fuel tank, filter replacement may be necessary. See your the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
local dealer for service. ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
Catalytic Converter mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
catalyst as an emission control device. resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
damage. against you.
WARNING! To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
motion.
grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-
haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in • Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
areas where your exhaust system can contact any- vehicle.
thing that can burn. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
Maintenance-Free Battery
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is perma- 7
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
nently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
periodic maintenance required.
tained immediately.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can • It is essential when replacing the cables on the
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid battery that the positive cable is attached to the
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean positive post and the negative cable is attached to
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme- tive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
diately with large amounts of water. battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep terminal posts and free of corrosion.
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use • If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
a booster battery or any other booster source with vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
an output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
clamps to touch each other. use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
• Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING!

For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
at the start of each warm season. This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
performance check. Drive belt tension should also be flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
checked at this time. unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant 7
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling frame with the direction of airflow (away from the
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar- blower motor and towards the center of the car).
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” section of this
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
manual for the recommended air conditioning filter
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
replacement intervals.
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment. Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
A/C Air Filter pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
The filter access door is located under the instrument DaimlerChrysler Dealership.⬙
panel on the passenger side. To replace the filter slide the
lock toward the rear of the vehicle (unlock position).
Remove the access door and pull the filter downward.
When installing a new filter, ensure its proper orienta-
tion. Align the black arrow on the bottom of the filter
WARNING! Steering Shaft Seal

The steering shaft seal, at the point where the shaft passes
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and through the bulkhead, is lubricated when it is installed. If
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving the seal becomes noisy when the steering shaft is turned,
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do it should be lubricated with a multi-purpose grease.
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended Mopar multi-purpose lubricant is recommended.
power steering fluid. Steering Linkage
The tie rod end ball joints are permanently lubricated and
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated do not require periodic maintenance.
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
Drive Shaft Universal Joints
surfaces. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and
Your vehicle has constant velocity universal joints. Peri-
Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
odic lubrication of these joints is not required. However,
Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints the joint boots should be inspected for external leakage or 7
The suspension ball joints are permanently sealed. No damage when other maintenance is performed. If leakage
regular maintenance is required for these components. or damage is evident, the universal joint boot and grease
should be replaced immediately.
Continued operation could result in failure of the univer- The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
sal joint due to water and dirt contamination of the year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
grease. This would require complete replacement of the amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
joint assembly. Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
seat tracks, doors, liftgate and hood hinges, should be should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli- mulations of salt or road film.
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
from a dry windshield.
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield and Rear Window Washers

The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked for fluid level at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
Washer Fluid Reservoir

Exhaust System 7
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust Cooling System

system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is WARNING!
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, • When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, controlled and can start at any time the ignition
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised switch is in the ON position.
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. • You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
WARNING! steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless. when the radiator is hot.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-
low the preceding safety tips.
Coolant Checks drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
face of the condenser. of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
antifreeze solution.
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks. Selection Of Coolant 7
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
for correct coolant type.
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
Adding Coolant
CAUTION!
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en- coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
gine coolants, may result in engine damage and may coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before
decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT cool- replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
ant is introduced into the cooling system in an nance period, it is important that you use the same
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
coolant as soon as possible. these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi-
tive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% rec-
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not ommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-
may plug the radiator. ogy), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher
This vehicle has not been designed for use with concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene ⫺34°F (⫺37°C ) are anticipated.
Glycol based coolants is not recommended. Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of WARNING!
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
the vehicle is operated.
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
changes. while the system is hot or under pressure.
Cooling System Pressure Cap • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the engine damage may result. 7
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your be checked once a month.
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
not overfill.
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician Points To Remember
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
Coolant Level few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
engine off and cold, the coolant level in the coolant humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
on the bottle. enter the radiator.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
condenser clean, also.
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be • Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
protected against freezing. operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
mileage, and increased emissions.
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks. Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber. 7
aluminum components.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or WARNING!

collapsed.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
present.
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
Components should be replaced immediately if there is possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure. braking capacity in an emergency.
Brakes
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake Brake And Power Steering Hoses
system components should be inspected periodically. When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte- inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
nance Schedules. heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling
indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention
should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest
to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or should be replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration
collapsed. of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a
burst failure.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present. WARNING!
NOTE: Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid, Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera- You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
tions to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings. cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not hoses replaced immediately.
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of
hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during
Master Cylinder — ABS Brakes Brake Fluid Level
vehicle operation), should be noted before a hose is
replaced based on leakage.
Check 7
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be performed when performing underhood services, or immediately if
whenever the brake system is serviced and at every the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
engine oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for
surface cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any
evidence of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing WARNING!
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
brake fluid catching fire.
cause leaking in the system.
• Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require- boiling point or unidentified as to specification,
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc may result in sudden brake failure during hard
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts moisture.
for correct fluid type.
Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings

CAUTION!
to insure they are properly installed and fully connected.
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate See your authorized dealer for service.
the brake fluid, all brake seal components could be Automatic Transmission
damaged causing partial or complete brake failure. The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
Fuel System Hoses All automatic transmissions are equipped with a conven-
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are tional filler tube and dipstick. If fluid is added, it should
designed with hoses and quick connect fittings which be added through the dipstick hole in the case.
have unique material characteristics to provide adequate
sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline. The dipstick is located just behind the radiator, lower
right side.
You are urged to use only the manufacture specified
hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in Selection of Lubricant 7
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
connect fittings that have been removed during service. mance. Use only manufacturers recommended transmis-
sion fluid, refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and
Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. It is important that

the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed
level using the recommended fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration Procedure For Checking Fluid Level
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to transmission and of the fluid.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type. To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level,
the following procedure must be used:
1. The vehicle must be on level ground.
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a
minimum of 60 seconds.
3. Fully apply parking brake. b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD”.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in P (PARK). Wipe the area If the fluid level indicates low, add sufficient fluid to
around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of bring to the proper level.
dirt entering the transmission.
5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot CAUTION!
or warm. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transmission
been driven at least 15 miles (24 km). The fluid cannot be can cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water
comfortably held between the finger tips. Cold is when from entering the transmission after checking or
the fluid is below 80°F (27°C). replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap
is reseated properly.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. 7
Remove dipstick and note reading.
Fluid and Filter Changes
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the Automatic transmission fluid should be changed on all
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper transmissions as follows:
two holes in the dipstick).
Normal Usage — No change necessary
Severe Usage (fluid and filter) — Refer to Maintenance All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
Schedule “B” Under normal operating conditions, periodic fluid level
checks and lubricant changes for the Power Transfer
Severe Usage is defined as:
Unit, Overrunning Clutch and Rear Carrier, are not
• Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or required. However when the vehicle is serviced for other
trailer towing where the vehicle driven regularly for reasons, the exterior surface of these components should
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation. be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed leaks
should be repaired as soon as possible.
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for Mainte-
nance Schedules. Power Transfer Unit
The fill plug is located on the side of the power transfer
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
unit housing. The fluid should be maintained at a level
fluid and filter should be changed.
even with the bottom of the fill plug hole when the
Special Additives vehicle is parked on a level surface. If it becomes neces-
Do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The sary to add or replace the fluid, use only the manufac-
only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to turers recommended fluid, refer to Recommended Flu-
aid in detecting fluid leaks. The use of transmission ids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect
seals.
Overrunning Clutch Fluid Changes

The fill plug is located on the side of the overrunning The fluid should be changed as follows:
clutch housing. The fluid should be maintained at a level Normal Usage No Service Required
even with the bottom of the fill plug hole when the Severe Usage
vehicle is parked on a level surface. If it becomes neces-
Power Transfer Unit Refer to Maintenance
sary to add or replace the fluid, use only the manufac- Schedule “B”
turers recommended transmission fluid, refer to Recom-
Overrunning Clutch Refer to Maintenance
mended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
Schedule “B”
fluid type. To assure performance, it is important that the
Rear Carrier Refer to Maintenance
proper lubricant be used.
Schedule “B”
Rear Carrier Severe Usage is defined as:
The fill plug is located on the side of the rear carrier
housing. The fluid should be maintained at a level even 1. More than 50% of vehicle operation in stop and go 7
with the bottom of the fill plug hole when the vehicle is traffic where vehicle is driven regularly for more than 45
parked on a level surface. if it becomes necessary to add minutes of continuous operation, such as in heavy city or
or replace the fluid, use only the manufacturers recom- in construction zone traffic,
mended fluid, refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants 2. Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. trailer towing where the vehicle driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for Mainte- The following maintenance recommendations will enable
nance Schedules. you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
Front And Rear Wheel Bearings
Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed. What Causes Corrosion?
No regular maintenance is required for these compo- Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
nents. paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion The most common causes are:
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
• Stone and gravel impact.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on • Insects, tree sap and tar.
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
Washing
CAUTION!
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
rinse the panels completely with clear water. such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.
Special Care
• Use Mopar auto polish to remove road film and stains
and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to scratch • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
the paint. near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
finish. of the doors, rocker panels and liftgate be kept clear 7
and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. packaged and sealed.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil-
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
ity of the owner.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
• Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
with mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To
color of your vehicle.
remove heavy soil, select a nonabrasive, non-acidic
cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle Interior Care
brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar cleaners are Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery and
recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid auto- carpeting.
matic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh
Use Mopar Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery and
brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective fin-
trim.
ish.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular Glass Surfaces

cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter- sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
required to maintain the original condition.
directly on the mirror.
WARNING! Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are 7
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
Removal
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
Grab the center of the rubber portion of the cupholder
rag.
and lift upward.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Cleaning
Seat Belt Maintenance Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. the liner from the water and dip it back into the water
about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer
wash them.
surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
Installation
buckles do not work properly.
Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly.
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM) Cavity Maxi Fuse Description

1 40 Amp Anti-Lock Brake System
Green (ABS) Pump
2 Spare
3 30 Amp Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
Pink
4 40 Amp Body Control Module
Green (BCM) Feed 1
5 40 Amp Electronic Back Light (EBL)
Green
6 30 Amp Front Wipers
Pink
Integrated Power Module (IPM) 7 40 Amp Starter 7
Green
An Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains maxi 8 40 Amp Power Seat C/B
Green
fuses, mini fuses and relays. A label that identifies each
component is printed on the inside of the cover. 9 40 Amp Power Sunroof
Green
Cavity Maxi Fuse Description Cavity Mini Fuse Description

10 Spare 24 20 Amp Yel- Power Outlet (Selectable)
11 40 Amp Headlight Washer, Power low
Green Liftgate 25 15 Amp Blue Radio, Amplifier, Naviga-
12 Spare tion, Hands-Free Phone
13 40 Amp Radiator Fan 1 (HFM), Electronic Vehicle
Green Information Center (EVIC),
EC, SNRF, Mirror
14 Spare
26 20 Amp Yel- Power Outlet
15 40 Amp Anti-Lock Brake System low
Green (ABS) Module
27 Spare
40 40 Amp Driver Door Node
Green 28 25 Amp Horn
Natural
41 40 Amp Passenger Door Node
Green 29 20 Amp Yel- Cluster, CHMSL, Stop
low Lights, Anti-Lock Brake
42 40 Amp Front Blower System (ABS)
Green
30 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch
31 20 Amp Yel- Hazard
low
Cavity Mini Fuse Description Cavity Mini Fuse Description

34 Spare 47 20 Amp Yel- Driver Door
35 Spare low
36 20 Amp Yel- Electronic Automatic 48 15 Amp Blue PLG, OHC, Body Control
low Transaxle (EATX) Solenoid Module (BCM), Naviga-
37 25 Amp ASD tion, Hands-Free Phone
Natural (HFM)
38 20 Amp Yel- Fuel Pump 49 25 Amp Amplifier
low Natural
39 20 Amp Yel- A/C Clutch, MTV 50 15 Amp Blue HVAC, DVD, RAD, CLK,
low SKREEM
44 25 Amp Rear Heated Seats
Natural 7
45 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Ignition Run
46 20 Amp Yel- Passenger Door
low
VEHICLE STORAGE
CAUTION!
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
• When installing the Integrated Power Module days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop- You may:
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so • Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
failure. service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
started again.
system overload. If a properly rated fuse contin-
ues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb Number

Back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number Rear Stop, Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Center & Rear Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Rear Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Front Door Courtesy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Liftgate Light(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Front Turn Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157A
Overhead Console Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 212–2 Front Sidemarker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Visor Vanity Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V26377 Standard Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H7
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replace-
ment instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement. 7
BULB REPLACEMENT 2. Remove the rubber boot seals.

Standard Quad Headlights 3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
1. Remove the two screws securing the headlight mod- 4. Rotate the bulb to the left and replace the bulb.
ule to the vehicle and pull the headlight module forward Reinstall the rubber boot seals and then the headlight
away from the vehicle, disengaging the assembly from module.
the lower attachment clip.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) — If NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-
Equipped charge Headlights (HID), when the headlights are turned
The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube. on there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as
headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of the system charges.
this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb
yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the
headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
7
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-
erly. See your authorized dealer for service.
Front Park/Turn Signal and Sidemarker Lights 3. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket and then reinstall
the headlight module.
1. Remove the two screws securing the headlight mod-
ule to the vehicle and pull the headlight module forward Front Fog Light
away from the vehicle, disengaging the assembly from
1. Reach under the front fascia and grasp the front fog
the lower attachment clip.
light bulb.
2. Twist the front fog light bulb to remove from the fog
light module.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
2. Twist the bulb socket to remove from the headlight bulb with rubbing alcohol.
module and pull the bulb from socket.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker and 3. Twist the socket assembly to remove it from the
Back-up Lights housing.
1. Raise the liftgate. 4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
2. Remove the two tail light assembly screws and rotate 5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
the assembly outward to remove the ball stud form the tail light assembly.
attaching grommet.
License Light
1. Place a screwdriver in the slot next to the release tab
and push on the release tab to remove the lens.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Replace the bulb and
push on the lens until it snaps into place.
7
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric
Fuel (approximate) 89 23 gallons 87 liters
Octane
Engine Oil-With Filter
3.5 Liter Engines (SAE 10W-30, API Certified) 5.5 qts 5.2 liters
3.8 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5.0 qts 4.7 liters
Cooling System *
3.5 Liter Engines (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/ 10.7 qts 10.1 liters
100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.8 Liter Engines (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/ 11.8 qts 11.2 liters
100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology) or equivalent
3.5 Liter Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 engine oil, refer to oil viscosity chart for cor-
rect SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
3.8 Liter Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil. Refer to your oil filler cap for cor-
rect SAE grade, meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com-
partment.
Oil Filter, 3.5/3.8 Liter Engines Mopar威 5281090 or equiv.
Fuel Selection 89 Octane 7
Chassis
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Automatic Transmission Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
AWD Power Transfer Unit Mopar威 Gear Lubricant 75W-90 or equivalent.
AWD Overrunning Clutch Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
AWD Rear Carrier Mopar威 Gear Lubricant 75W-90 or equivalent.
Brake Master Cylinder Mopar威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 or DOT 4+ is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES N
T
E
N
A
CONTENTS N
C
E
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 372 ▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
S
䡵 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 ▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 372 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
N
T The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold There are two maintenance schedules that show the
E type must be done at the times or mileages specified to required service for your vehicle.
N assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
A First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated
N control system. These, and all other maintenance services
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
C included in this manual, should be done to provide best
E beginning of the schedule.
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
S tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating • Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
C conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving. • Stop and go driving.
E
D • Extensive engine idling.
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
U
L malfunction is suspected. • Driving in dusty conditions.
E
S NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis- • Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
8 performed by any automotive repair establishment or
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
individual using any automotive part which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor- • Trailer towing.〫
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 373 M
A
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser- NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in- I
N
vice).〫 tervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months T
whichever comes first. E
• Off-road or desert operation. N
A
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your N
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months, CAUTION! C
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the E
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual. may result in damage to the vehicle. S
C
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions H
listed for Schedule ⬙B⬙. At Each Stop for Fuel E
D
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not • Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully UL
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched- warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while E
ule ⬙B⬙. the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu- S
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi- racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the 8
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
interval that occurs first. • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
M 374 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Once a Month At Each Oil Change
N
T • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Change the engine oil filter.
E
N damage.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
A
N • Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
• Inspect the brake hoses.
C as required.
E • Inspect the CV joints and front suspension compo-
• Check the fluid levels of coolant bottle, brake master
S nents.
cylinder and transmission, add as needed.
C
H • Check the automatic transmission fluid level.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
E
D operation. • Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
U
L
E
S
8
SCHEDULE “B” 375 M
A
SCHEDULE “B” • Trailer towing.〫 I
N
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser- T
under one or more of the following conditions. Change E
vice).〫 N
the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000
A
miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under • Off-road or desert operation. N
one or more of the conditions marked with an 〫. C
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your E
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C). engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the S
• Stop and go driving. C
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual. H
• Extensive engine idling. E
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil D
• Driving in dusty conditions. at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ of the ⬙Mainte- U
nance Schedules⬙ section of this manual. L
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km). E
S
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
8
M 376 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles 3, 000 6, 000 9, 000 12, 000 15, 000 18, 000
T (Kilometers) (5 000 ) (10 000 ) (14 000) (19 000) (24 000) (29 000)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
A Rotate Tires X X X
N
C Inspect the brake linings. X X
E Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if X X X X X
S
necessary. *
C Replace the engine air cleaner filter. * X
H Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power X
E
D transfer unit fluid. (See note at the end of this
U chart)
L Replace the air conditioning filter. X
E
S
8
A
I
Miles 21, 000 24, 000 27, 000 30, 000 33, 000 36, 000 N
(Kilometers) (34 000) (38 000) (43 000) (48 000) (53 000) (58 000) T
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X N
Rotate Tires X X X A
N
Inspect the brake linings. X X C
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces- X X X X X E
sary. * S
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X C
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front & X H
E
Rear) D
Inspect the PCV valve and replace as necessary.* X U
L
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power transfer X E
unit fluid. (See note at the end of this chart) S
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) overrunning X 8
clutch and rear carrier fluid. (See the note at the
end of this chart)
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X
A
I
N Miles 39, 000 42, 000 45, 000 48, 000 51, 000 54, 000
T (Kilometers) (62 000) (67 000) (72 000) (77 000) (82 000) (86 000)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
A Rotate Tires X X X
N
C Inspect the brake linings. X X
E Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if X X X X X
S
necessary. *
C Replace the engine air cleaner filter. * X
H Change the All Wheel Drive power transfer X
E
D unit fluid. (See the note at the end of this
U chart.)
L Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) overrun- X
E
S ning clutch and rear carrier fluid. (See note at
the end of this chart)
8 Replace the air conditioning filter. X
A
I
Miles 57, 000 60, 000 63, 000 66, 000 69, 000 72, 000 N
(Kilometers) (91 000) (96 000) (101 000) (106 000) (110 000) (115 000) T
E
N
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if X X X X X E
necessary. * S
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front X H
E
& Rear) D
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if neces- X U
L
sary.* E
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if X S
necessary. ‡ 8
Change the automatic transmission fluid and X
filter.
A
I
N Miles 57, 000 60, 000 63, 000 66, 000 69, 000 72, 000
T (Kilometers) (91 000) (96 000) (101 000) (106 000) (110 000) (115 000)
E
N Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power X X
A transfer unit fluid. (See note at the end of this
N chart)
C
E Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) overrun- X
ning clutch and rear carrier fluid. (See note at
S the end of this chart)
C
H Replace the air conditioning filter. X X
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
Miles 75, 000 78, 000 81, 000 84, 000 87, 000 90, 000 N
(Kilometers) (120 000) (125 000) (130 000) (134 000) (139 000) (144 000) T
E
N
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if X X X X E
necessary. * S
Replace the engine air cleaner filter X X C
Replace the spark plugs. X H
E
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front X D
& Rear) U
L
Check the PCV valve and replace if necessary. X E
Not required if previously changed.* S
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if X X 8
necessary. ‡
Change the All Wheel Drive power transfer X X
unit fluid. (See the note at the end of this
chart.)
A
I
N Miles 75, 000 78, 000 81, 000 84, 000 87, 000 90, 000
T (Kilometers) (120 000) (125 000) (130 000) (134 000) (139 000) (144 000)
E
N Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) overrun- X
A ning clutch and rear carrier fluid. (See note at
N the end of this chart)
C
E Replace the air conditioning filter. X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
Miles 93, 000 96, 000 99, 000 100, 000 102, 000 105, 000 N
(Kilometers) (149 000) (154 000) (158 000) (160 000) (163 000) (168 000) T
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X N
Rotate Tires X X A
N
Inspect the brake linings. X C
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if X X X X X E
necessary. * S
Replace the engine air cleaner filter * X C
Replace engine timing belt. X H
E
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power X D
transfer unit fluid. (See note at the end of this U
chart) L
E
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) overrun- X S
ning clutch and rear carrier fluid. (See note at 8
the end of this chart)
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if X
necessary. ‡
A
I
N Miles 93, 000 96, 000 99, 000 100, 000 102, 000 105, 000
T (Kilometers) (149 000) (154 000) (158 000) (160 000) (163 000) (168 000)
E
N Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 X
A months or 100,000 miles.
N
C Replace the air conditioning filter. X
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
Miles 108, 000 111, 000 114, 000 117, 000 120, 000 N
(Kilometers) (173 000) (178 000) (182 000) (187 000) (192 000) T
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X N
N
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces- X X X X E
sary. * S
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front & X H
E
Rear) D
Inspect the PCV valve and replace as necessary.* X U
L
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if neces- X E
sary. ‡ S
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. X 8
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power transfer X
unit fluid. (See note at the end of this chart)
A
I * This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture NOTE: The AWD power transfer unit fluid and the
N
T to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis- AWD overrunning clutch/ rear carrier fluid must be
E sions warranty. changed at the more frequent intervals shown in sched-
N ule B if the vehicle is operated under any of the condi-
A ‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
N tions noted by a diamond (〫) at the beginning of the
C Inspection and service should also be performed anytime schedule.
E a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
S ceipts.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
SCHEDULE “A” 387 M
A
SCHEDULE “A” I
N
Miles 6, 000 12, 000 18, 000 24, 000 30, 000 36, 000 T
E
(Kilometers) (10 000) (19 000) (29 000) (38 000 ) (48 000) (58 000) N
[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30] [36] A
N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X C
Rotate Tires X X X X X X E
Inspect the brake linings. X X S
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if X X X X X C
necessary. * H
E
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X D
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front X U
L
& Rear) E
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X S
8
M 388 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles 42, 000 48, 000 54, 000 60, 000 66, 000 72, 000
T (Kilometers) (67 000) (77 000) (86 000) (96 000) (106 000) (115 000)
E
N [Months] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66] [72]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
N
C Rotate Tires X X X X X X
E Inspect the brake linings. X X
S Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if X X X X X
C necessary. *
H Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X
E
D Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front X
U & Rear)
L
E Check the PCV valve and replace, if neces- X
S sary.*
8 Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if X X
necessary. ‡
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 X
months, regardless of mileage.
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X
A
I
Miles 78, 000 84, 000 90, 000 96, 000 100, 000 N
(Kilometers) (125 000) (134 000) (144 000) (154 000) (160 000) T
E
[Months] [78] [84] [90] [96] N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X A
N
Rotate Tires X X X X C
Inspect the brake linings. X E
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces- X X X X S
sary. * C
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X H
E
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front & X D
Rear) U
L
Check and replace the PCV valve , if necessary.* X E
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if neces- X S
sary. ‡ 8
Replace the spark plugs. X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 100,000 X
miles, if not done at 60 months.
M 390 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles 102, 000 108, 000 114, 000 120, 000
T (Kilometers) (163 000) (173 000) (182 000) (192 000)
E
N [Months] [102] [108] [114] [120]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X
N
C Rotate Tires X X X X
E Inspect the brake linings. X
S Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. * X X X
C Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X
H
E Replace engine timing belt. X
D Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front & Rear) X
U
L Check the PCV valve and replace, if necessary.* X
E Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if necessary. ‡ X X
S
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months, if not X
8 done at 100,000 miles (160 000 km).
A
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture I
WARNING! N
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis- T
sions warranty. You can be badly injured working on or around a E
N
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which A
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If N
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime you have any doubt about your ability to perform a C
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re- E
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
ceipts. chanic. S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your 䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 ▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
䡵 Mopar威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 ▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 9
394 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests

YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
Prepare For The Appointment
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
work to be performed may not be covered by the
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
pointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem. The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
Prepare A List your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 395
Warranty service must be done by an authorized Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend Center should include the following information:
that you take your vehicle to you selling dealer. They
• Owner’s name and address
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The • Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
• Dealership name
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely • Vehicle identification number
manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
P.O. Box 21–8004
this process.
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Phone: (800) 992-1997
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
want to know if you need assistance.
P.O. Box 1621
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 9
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center. Phone —(800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact: Service Contract

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 You may have purchased a service contract for your
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
Mexico, D. F. pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240 limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240 hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
date. If you have any questions about your service
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service WARRANTY INFORMATION
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It See your manufacturer’s Warranty Information Booklet
is not responsible for any service contract other than the for information on warranty coverage and transfer of
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a warranty.
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
9
U.S. ONLY
MOPAR姞 PARTS To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are Hotline toll free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Wash-
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your ington DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of
vehicle operating at its best. Transportation, Washington DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS the Hotline.
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause In Canada:
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra- should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy 3V9.
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer. 9
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS • Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.

To order the following manuals, you may use either the
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
for an order form.
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes). procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
• Service Manuals.
• Owner’s Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
of the vehicle, system and/or components is written in cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams safety tips.
and charts.
Call Toll Free at 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) or 1–800–387–1143 Treadwear

(Canada) The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
Or
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-
Visit us on the World Wide Web at: ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com or
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
TIRE QUALITY GRADES in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
The following describes the tire grading categories estab- characteristics and climate.
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis- Traction Grades
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
of the tires on your car. pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
Requirements in Addition to These Grades. crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor- 9
mance.
WARNING! WARNING!
The traction grade is based on braking (straight- The temperature grade is established for a tire that is
ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
(turning) performance. speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup
Temperature Grades and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (highest), B, and C, repre-
senting the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance which all passen-
ger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
INDEX
10
404 INDEX
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 All Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255,281,352

Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,339 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 341,342,368
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223,228 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,336 Anti-Theft Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . 223,228,232,335 Arming Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control . . . . . . . . 224 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,18
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,50,58,69,173 Automatic Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Airbag, Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
INDEX 405
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349,370 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,346
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347,370
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,346
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,253,254 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 67
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Keyless Transmitter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Caps, Filler
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328,329
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 10
406 INDEX
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,61
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Cargo Compartment Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 220 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,183
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193,198 Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,339 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,201,203 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183,187,193,200,203 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
CD Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,222 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Coolant Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170,323 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
INDEX 407
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Digital Video Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,344 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Dipsticks
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Disposal
Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,368,369 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,358 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,228,239 Driving
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 10
408 INDEX
DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,290
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,368
Electronic Vehicle Information Center . . . . . . . . . 174 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,368,369
Emergency, In Case of Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328,329
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328,368
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 323,372 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,321 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,68,290,340
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,321
INDEX 409
Filters Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124,171,366

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,336 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330,369 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Flashers Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166,366,367 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,369
Fluid Level Checks Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,368
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347,370 Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336,370 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 10
410 INDEX
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Head Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Gas Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290,323 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Gauges High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 125
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,23,284 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Homelink Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345,349
Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
INDEX 411
Ignition Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Indicator, Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Key, Sentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,164,165 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,122 CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,61
Intermittent Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Latches
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,306 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,120
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,58,69,173 10
412 INDEX
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Liftgate Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,364 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,364
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124,171,366 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 170
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,125,366,367
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,364,365 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 165
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,293
INDEX 413
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,116
Locks Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,61 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Luggage Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Maintenance, Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Schedule ⬙A⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Schedule ⬙B⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325,399
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Malfunction Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170,323
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 10
414 INDEX
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Octane Rating, Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 137
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165,301
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,369 Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,400
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330,369 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328,368 Phone, Hands-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 269
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328,329,368 Power
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,323 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Opener, Garage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Operator Manuals (Owner’s Manuals) . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
INDEX 415
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183,193
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102,103 Rear Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Rear Seating Flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Pretensioners Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . 139,144,176 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,314
Programming Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . 22,139,144 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 341,343 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,222 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279,281
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,218 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 10
416 INDEX
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,65 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 38
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102,103
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
INDEX 417
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,369 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Steering
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261,336
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . 170 Shaft Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,183 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166,366,367 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151,362
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,362
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,277,304 Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 44
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 10
418 INDEX
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Temperature Control, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 165,301 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,61 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268,269
Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279,281
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . 268,269 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263,272
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,272,401 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
INDEX 419
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,314 Transmitter Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Trailering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,168,262 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,262 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125,166,366,367
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,253,254 Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349,370 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 10
420 INDEX
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269,292,293 Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,148
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,362 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Vehicle Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Video Entertainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,339
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . 165 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,339 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Zone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

2005 CS Pacifica

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2005 CS Pacifica

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2005 CS Pacifica

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS

NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power

Door Lock Plunger

Child Lock Control

NOTE: If desired, the “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door

If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate

The alarm system will be activated when the battery is

NOTE: liftgate is fully open, pressing the button twice within

When the lock switch is pressed the window controls on

normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock WARNING!

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

Removing Slack From Belt

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will

Positioning Latch Plate

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch

Sliding The Latch Plate

Seat Belt Pretensioners Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System

Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental

Front Airbag Components

Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal

WARNING! Along with seat belts, and pretensioners, front airbags

WARNING! “The Airbag System” consists of the following:

• Interconnecting Wiring severity, the front control module determines the

Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning WARNING!

The ORC will not allow front airbag deployment in the

Passenger Airbag Disabled Light

• The Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) is located at the WARNING!

However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a WARNING!

Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING!

WARNING! • You need proper knee impact protection in a

• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second WARNING!

The lower anchor bars of the LATCH System are located

Tether Strap Mounting

When using the LATCH System, always follow the child

SAFETY TIPS WARNING!

䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 ▫ Third Row Seating — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 113

▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 䡵 Traction Control Switch — If Equipped . . . . . . . 130

MIRRORS Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the

Adjusting Rear View Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If

Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side WARNING!

Sun Visor Extension For UConnect Customer Support call 1-877-855-8400 or

linked to system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular

Help Command Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone

List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook Phone Call Features

Conference Call Redial

Working with Automated Systems sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be

• It is not recommended to store similar sounding • low-to-medium vehicle speed,

Bluetooth Communication Link Power-Up

10–Way Driver’s Power Seat

WARNING! 4–Way Passenger’s Power Seat

Adjustable Head Restraints